You are on page 1of 558

3500i

TASKalfa
4500i
5500i
OPERATION GUIDE

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of 3500i/4500i/5500i.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy
reference.

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.

A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.

In this Operation Guide, 3500i/4500i/5500i are referred to as 35 ppm model, 45 ppm model, and 55 ppm model
respectively.

Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Quick Guide
Describes the procedures for frequently-used operations.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (3500i/4500i/5500i)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary labels, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
DVD (Product Library)
• Operation Guide (This Guide) • Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
• FAX Operation Guide • KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
• Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide • KMnet Viewer User Guide
• Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide • File Management Utilitiy User Guide
• Command Center RX Operation Guide • PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
• Printer Driver User Guide • PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result
from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with the related points.

Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground
....
connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

i

Contents

Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Laser Safety (Europe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix

1 Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2 Preparation before Use
Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Confirmation Screen of Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Using the Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Using Weekly Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Checking Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

4 Copying Functions

ii

Contents

Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Fold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Paper Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Margin/Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Page #. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Memo Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Negative Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
DP Read Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

5 Printing
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

6 Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Sending Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2-sided/Book Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Original Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Background Density Adj.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

iii

Contents

Border Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
E-mail Subject/Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
(Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Scanning using TWAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Text Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Bates Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Scanning with FMU Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

7 Document Box
Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

8 Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

9 Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Document Box/Removable Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Restart Entire Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-102
Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Document Guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Optional Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108

iv

Contents

10 Management
User Login Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Job Accounting Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

11 Maintenance
Regular Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

12 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Responding when Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-9
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-20
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-30

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1

v

Quick Guide Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.

Administrator tasks

To make copies To print
Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print
copies. You can also fine-tune the a PDF file directly from USB
It copies. It prints.
copy settings by changing the memory.
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.

Copying with Printing Documents Print
What specific Stored in Removable via a
you want settings USB Memory network
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer
driver on your
computer *1
Setup

Loading Paper...2-27

Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-43

Printing Printing -
Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from
Operation
...4-1 in Removable USB Applications
Memory... 7-22 ...5-2

*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.

vi

Administrator tasks

To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
It sends.

Send Send to Saving
What as Folder Documents to
you want E-mail (SMB) USB Memory
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug in the USB
memory

Create a shared folder on the destination computer.

Setup
Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One
Touch Keys)...9-77 *1

Placing Originals on the Platen...2-43

Sending...3-22 Saving Documents
Operation to USB Memory
Sending Functions...6-1
(Scan to USB)...7-24

*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.

vii

Administrator tasks

To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes. NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System
(V) Operation Guide.

FAX directly FAX without using the
What Send a FAX from a telephone line
you want computer (Internet FAX (i-FAX))
to do

Connect the modular cord for the
telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line
(Inch version only)

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer *1
Setup

Using the Address Book...3-17
on the FAX System (V) Operation Guide *2

Loading Paper...2-27

FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax (i-FAX)
(Basic)...3-1 FAX...9-1 (Optional)...8-1
Operation on the FAX System (V) on the FAX System (V) on the FAX System (V)
Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide

*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the
address directly.

viii

Menu Map
(The names displayed on the touch panel are used here. These may differ from the referenced titles.)

Org./Paper/Finishing Original Size (page 4-2)

Paper Selection (page 4-3)

Mixed Size Originals (page 4-6)

Original Orientation (page 4-9)

Fold (page 4-11)

Collate/Offset (page 3-14)

Staple/Punch Staple
(page 3-18)

Punch
(page 3-20)

Paper Output (page 4-13)

Image Quality Density (page 3-8)

Original Image (page 3-9)

EcoPrint (page 4-33)

Sharpness (page 4-34)

Background Density Adj. (page 4-35)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-36)

Layout/Edit Zoom (page 3-10)

Combine (page 4-14)

Margin/Centering (page 4-16)

Border Erase (page 4-18)

Booklet (page 4-20)

Duplex (page 3-12)

Cover (page 4-22)

Form Overlay (page 4-23)

Page # (page 4-24)

Memo Page (page 4-26)

Image Repeat (page 4-28)

Text Stamp (page 4-30)

Bates Stamp (page 4-31)

ix

/Sending Data Format Original Size (page 6-2) Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11) Original Orientation (page 6-12) Sending Size (page 6-4) File Format (page 6-14) File Separation (page 6-15) Long Original (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-19) Original Image (page 6-18) Scan Resolution (page 6-20) FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Color Selection (page 6-23) Sharpness (page 6-21) Background Density Adj.Advanced Setup Continuous Scan (page 4-37) Auto Image Rotation (page 4-38) Negative Image (page 4-38) Mirror Image (page 4-39) Job Finish Notice (page 4-40) File Name Entry (page 4-42) Priority Override (page 4-42) Repeat Copy (page 4-43) DP Read Action (page 4-44) Program (page 3-55) Destination Address Book (page 3-39) E-mail Addr Entry (page 3-23) Folder Path Entry (page 3-24) FAX No. Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide) i-FAX Addr Entry (refer to Fax Operation Guide) WSD Scan (page 6-30) Org. (page 6-22) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) x .

Advanced Setup Zoom (page 6-6) Centering (page 6-7) Border Erase (page 6-26) FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Continuous Scan (page 6-24) Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) File Name Entry (page 6-28) E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29) i-FAX Subject/Body (refer to Fax Operation Guide) FAX Direct Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide) FAX Polling RX (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Send and Print (page 6-36) Send and Store (page 6-36) FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37) Text Stamp (page 6-38) Bates Stamp (page 6-39) Program (page 3-55) Custom Box Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-2) Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11) Original Orientation (page 6-12) Storing Size (page 7-4) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) Density (page 6-19) Original Image (page 6-18) Scan Resolution (page 6-20) Color Selection (page 6-23) Sharpness (page 6-21) Background Density Adj. (page 6-22) Zoom (page 6-6) Centering (page 6-7) xi .

(page 4-35) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-36) Send Destination (page 3-39) xii . Border Erase (page 6-26) Continuous Scan (page 6-24) Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) File Name Entry (page 6-28) Open Print Functions Paper Selection (page 4-3) Collate/Offset (page 3-14) Staple/Punch Staple (page 3-18) Punch (page 3-20) Paper Output (page 4-13) Combine (page 4-14) Margin/Centering (page 4-16) Booklet (page 4-20) Duplex (page 3-12) Cover (page 4-22) Form Overlay (page 7-9) Page # (page 4-24) Job Finish Notice (page 4-40) File Name Entry (page 4-42) Delete after Printed (page 7-2) Priority Override (page 4-42) EcoPrint (page 4-33) Zoom (page 6-6) Fold (page 4-11) Text Stamp (page 4-30) Bates Stamp (page 4-31) Image Density (page 3-8) Quality Original Image (page 3-9) Sharpness (page 4-34) Background Density Adj.

) (page 3-45) Add/Edit Box (page 7-2) xiii . Functions Sending Size (page 6-4) File Format (page 6-14) FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Centering (page 6-7) FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) File Name Entry (page 6-28) E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29) i-FAX Subject/Body (refer to Fax Operation Guide) FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37) Delete after Transmitted (page 7-8) Zoom (page 6-6) File Separation (page 6-15) Text Stamp (page 6-38) Bates Stamp (page 6-39) Color/Image Density (page 6-19) Quality Original Image (page 6-18) Resolution (page 6-20) Color Selection (page 6-23) Sharpness (page 6-21) Background Density Adj. (page 6-22) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) Join (page 7-11) Move/Copy (page 7-10) Detail (page 3-45) Search(Name) (page 3-45) Search(No.

(page 6-22) Zoom (page 6-6) Centering (page 6-7) Border Erase (page 6-26) Continuous Scan (page 6-24) Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) File Name Entry (page 6-28) File Format (page 6-14) Text Stamp (page 6-38) Bates Stamp (page 6-39) Print Functions Paper Selection (page 4-3) Collate/Offset (page 3-14) Staple/Punch Staple (page 3-18) Punch (page 3-20) Paper Output (page 4-13) Duplex (page 3-12) Job Finish Notice (page 4-40) Priority Override (page 4-42) Fold (page 4-11) xiv .Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 7-14) Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 7-15) Repeat Copy (page 7-18) Form for Form Overlay (page 7-20) Removable Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-2) Memory Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11) Original Orientation (page 6-12) Storing Size (page 7-4) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) Density (page 6-19) Original Image (page 6-18) Scan Resolution (page 6-20) Color Selection (page 6-23) Sharpness (page 6-21) Background Density Adj.

Text Stamp (page 4-30) Bates Stamp (page 4-31) Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-23) JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23) XPS Fit to Page (page 7-23) FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Program (page 3-55) Printing Jobs (page 8-3) Sending Jobs (page 8-5) Storing Jobs (page 8-6) Device/Communication (page 8-14) Paper/Supplies (page 8-13) Common Settings Language (page 9-2) Default Screen (page 9-3) Sound Buzzer (page 9-4) FAX Speaker Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide) FAX Monitor Volume (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Keyboard Layout (page Appendix-9) Original / Paper Custom Original Size (page 9-4) Settings Custom Paper Size (page 9-5) Cassette Setting (page 9-6) MP Tray Setting (page 9-7) Media Type Setting (page 9-8) Default Paper Source (page 9-9) Original Auto Detect (page 9-10) Media for Auto (Color) (page 9-10) Media for Auto (B & W) (page 9-10) Paper Source for Cover (page 9-11) Special Paper Action (page 9-11) Measurement (page 9-12) xv .

(Send/Store) (page 9-20) Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 9-20) Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) (page 9-20) Zoom (page 9-21) Border Erase Default (page 9-21) Border Erase to Back Page (page 9-22) Margin Default (page 9-22) Auto Image Rotation (page 9-22) EcoPrint (page 9-23) Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) (page 9-23) High Comp. PDF Image (page 9-24) Color TIFF Compression (page 9-24) xvi .Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 9-13) Finishing Error (page 9-13) No Staple Error (page 9-13) Finishing Pages Exceeded (page 9-13) Punch Waste Full Error (page 9-14) Paper Mismatch Error (page 9-14) Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 9-14) Paper Jam before Staple (page 9-14) Paper Output (page 9-15) Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16) Function Defaults Original Orientation (page 9-16) Original Image (Copy) (page 9-17) Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 9-17) Scan Resolution (page 9-18) FAX TX Resolution (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Color Selection (page 9-18) File Format (page 9-18) File Separation (page 9-19) Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 9-19) BackgrndDens.

(page 9-44) Color Type (page 9-44) Default Screen (page 9-45) Send and Forward (page 9-45) Document Box/ Custom Box (page 9-52) Removable Memory FAX Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 7-15) Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 7-18) Deletion of Job Retention (page 7-21) Polling Box (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Quick Setup Registration (page 9-53) xvii . Image Quality (File Format) (page 9-24) Collate/Offset (page 9-25) JPEG/TIFF Print (page 9-25) XPS Fit to Page (page 9-26) Continuous Scan (page 9-26) PDF/A (page 9-26) File Name Entry (page 9-27) E-mail Subject/Body (page 9-27) Repeat Copy (page 9-28) DP Read Action (page 9-28) USB Keyboard Type (page 9-29) System Stamp (page 9-29) Manual Staple (page 9-38) Customize Status Display (page 9-39) Low Toner Alert Level (page 9-39) Copy Paper Selection (page 9-40) Auto Paper Selection (page 9-41) Auto % Priority (page 9-41) Reserve Next Priority (page 9-42) Preset Limit (page 9-42) Quick Setup Registration (page 9-42) Send Quick Setup Registration (page 9-43) Dest. Check before Send (page 9-43) Entry Check for New Dest.

FAX (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Printer Emulation (page 9-54) EcoPrint (page 9-56) Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) (page 9-56) Override A4/Letter (page 9-56) Duplex (page 9-57) Copies (page 9-57) Orientation (page 9-58) Form Feed Timeout (page 9-58) LF Action (page 9-59) CR Action (page 9-59) Job Name (page 9-59) User Name (page 9-60) Paper Feed Mode (page 9-60) KIR (page 9-60) System Network Host Name (page 9-90) TCP/IP Setting TCP/IP (page 9-90) IPv4 (page 9-91) IPv6 (page 9-92) Protocol Detail (page 9-94) NetWare (page 9-95) AppleTalk (page 9-95) WSD Scan (page 9-96) WSD Print (page 9-96) Enhanced WSD (page 9-96) Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 9-97) Secure Protocol SSL (page 9-97) IPP Security (page 9-98) HTTP Security (page 9-98) LDAP Security (page 9-99) SMTP Security (page 9-99) xviii .

Send/Box (Auto) (page 9-66) Correcting Black Line (page 9-67) xix . POP3 Security (User 1) (page 9-100) POP3 Security (User 2) (page 9-100) POP3 Security (User 3) (page 9-100) IPSec (page 9-100) LAN Interface (page 9-101) Restart Network (page 9-101) Restart Entire Device (page 9-89) Interface Block USB Host (page 9-102) Setting USB Device (page 9-102) Optional Interface 1 (page 9-102) Optional Interface 2 (page 9-102) Security Level (page 9-103) Document Guard (page 9-103) Data Security (page 9-105) Optional Function (page 9-107) Date/Timer Date/Time (page 9-72) Date Format (page 9-72) Time Zone (page 9-73) Auto Panel Reset (page 9-73) Auto Sleep (page 9-74) Auto Error Clear (page 9-75) Low Power Timer (page 9-74) Panel Reset Timer (page 9-73) Sleep Timer (page 9-75) Interrupt Clear Timer (page 9-76) Error Job Skip (page 9-76) Error Clear Timer (page 9-75) Adjustment/ Density Adjustment Copy (page 9-65) Maintenance Send/Box (page 9-65) Background Density Copy (Auto) (page 9-66) Adj.

Authorization (page 10-10) Group List (page 10-11) xx . System Initialization (page 9-67) Display Brightness (page 9-68) Silent Mode (page 9-68) Auto Color Correction (page 9-68) Tone Curve Adjustment (page 9-68) Drum Refresh1 (page 9-69) Drum Refresh2 (page 9-70) Calibration Cycle (page 9-70) Calibration (page 9-71) Developer Refresh (page 9-71) Report Print Report Status Page (page 9-61) Font List (page 9-61) Network Status (page 9-62) Service Status (page 9-62) Result Report Setting Send Result Report (page 9-62) FAX RX Result Report (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Sending Log History Auto Sending (page 9-63) Send Log History (page 9-64) Destination (page 9-63) Job Log Subject (page 9-64) Edit Destination Address Book (page 9-77) One Touch Key (page 9-81) Print List (refer to Fax Operation Guide) Address Book Sort (page 9-83) Defaults Narrow Down (page 9-83) User Login/Job User Login Setting User Login (page 10-2) Accounting Local User List (page 10-5) Local Authorization (page 10-9) Group Group Authorization Set.

Authorization (page 10-12) Guest Property (page 10-13) Obtain NW User Property (page 10-15) Simple Login Simple Login Settings (page 10-17) Simple Login Key (page 10-17) Job Accounting Job Accounting (page 10-20) Setting Print Accounting Report (page 10-32) Total Job Accounting (page 10-29) Each Job Accounting (page 10-29) Accounting List (page 10-22) Default Setting Apply Limit (page 10-26) Copy/Printer Count (page 10-24) Default Counter Limit (page 10-26) Count by Paper Size (page 10-30) Unknown ID Job (page 10-10) User Property(page 10-9) Application (page 9-107) Internet (page 9-84) xxi . Guest Guest Authorization Set.

the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies.6 °F (27°C) or less and a humidity of 60% or less.5 °F (32. The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is too high or too low. however. Adjust the room temperature. It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature: around 60. but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. Message: "Warning for high temperature. If. humidity: around 36 to 65%." or "Warning for low temperature." To use the machine under optimum conditions.) • Humidity: 15 to 80% (But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.8 to 80. • Avoid locations with vibrations.) Use coated paper at a temperature of 80. During copying. it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. some ozone is released.Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows: • Temperature: 50 to 90. • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. when this machine is moved after installation. If the floor is easily damaged by casters. the smell may become unpleasant. • Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.5 °C). the floor material may be damaged.5 °F (10 to 32. xxii . In addition. • Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. Adjust the room temperature. • Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations. adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the message is displayed.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C).5 °C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90. Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work.

wash with soap and water. Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time. If necessary. If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box. Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. contact a physician. contact a physician. move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. • If you do happen to inhale toner. xxiii . as well as contact with your eyes and skin. but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode. If there is any remaining tenderness. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. return it to its original package and reseal it. avoid inhalation and ingestion. flush them thoroughly with water. • If toner does happen to get on your skin. remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose (MP) Tray. Do not turn off the main power switch.Cautions when handling consumables CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. • If you do happen to ingest toner. • If you do happen to get toner in your eyes. If coughing develops. rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. contact a physician.

no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.Laser Safety (Europe) Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area. The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine. xxiv . For this reason. In the normal operation of the product by user. laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover.

follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual. avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Safety switch The power to the laser unit is cut off when the right cover is opened. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit. the label is on the right. Maintenance For safety of the service personnel.S. This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U. never permits the laser beam to escape. 5. by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U. xxv . 4. without certification. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. 2. 3500i 4500i 5500i 3. enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers. Safety of laser beam This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U. 1. which is invisible. 1976.S. 2. 1976. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. On this machine. The laser optical system.SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) 1. The CDRH Act A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug.S. and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. Optical unit When checking the optical unit.

gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. which complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. This equipment generates. WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. However. (1) this device may not cause interference. Les interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors tension. which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on. • The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited. This device contains the module. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.ca. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.dtsc. pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.special handling may apply. the United States) This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material . and (2) this device must accept any interference. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. Radio Tag Technology In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted. uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and. Other precautions (for users in California. xxvi . • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions. See www. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension.

or province to province. xxvii . If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service. or check Kyocera’s website at http://www. or removed.Warranty (the United States) 3500i/4500i/5500i MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY Kyocera Mita America. (c) have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer. This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the original MFP for a period of one year or 300. or 300. THE MFP. This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to operator negligence. whichever first occurs. Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty. improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.kyoceramita. and the fixing unit. Inc. misuse. write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area. AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR. This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO. is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera. the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. the transfer belt. In order to obtain performance of this warranty. ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF. against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year. Maintenance Kits consist of the developing unit. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”). accidents.000 copies/prints from date of installation. nor any other person. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period. the drum unit. which vary from state to state. or (d) have had the serial number modified. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS. altered. Kyocera’s only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. (b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies. Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor. based upon the country of purchase. and Kyocera Mita Canada. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP.000 copies/prints. whichever first occurs. The Customer may also have other rights.com. OR INABILITY TO USE. Neither the seller. Ltd.

darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden. GPSGV. EK1-ITB 2000 Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. 06. EN ISO 7779 Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. • Paper money • Bank note • Securities • Stamp • Passport • Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779. xxviii . It may not be limited to these items.01. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

........................................................ xxxvii • About this Operation Guide ............................ xxxvii • Paper Recycling............................... xxxvii • Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.................................................................................................. xxx • Regarding Trade Names............... • Legal Information ....................... xxxvii • Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ................................................ xxxviii xxix .........................Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine.............. This chapter provides information on the following topics.................... xxx • Energy Saving Control Function .......................................................................

LTD. Japan and other countries. LTD.Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited.. Bonjour.S. Windows Server 2003. • AppleTalk. Windows. TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®. • Adobe Acrobat. Windows XP. • Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO. ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.. All rights reserved. Macintosh. LTD. • UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. • This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co. • TypeBankG-B. and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide. and other countries. • PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.. ITC Bookman. • Microsoft. Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems. registered in the U. Inc.A. • Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell. • Helvetica.. • © 2011 ACCESS CO.S. • ACCESS. and/or other countries. are installed in this machine. Incorporated. xxx .in the United States.. Windows Vista. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. Windows Server 2008. • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. • IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Ltd. Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH. • This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO. • All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc. • ITC Avant Garde Gothic. Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U. • This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group. Regarding Trade Names • PRESCRIBE and KPDL are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.

kyoceramita. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.gnu.gnu. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. INDIRECT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. For further information including availability of the source code. 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www. STRICT LIABILITY. DATA. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. (http:/ /www. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES.org/licenses/gpl. and you are permitted to copy. visit http://www. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. 5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. INCLUDING. SPECIAL. please contact openssl-core@openssl. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.org. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. For written permission. You can get the source code.html) and/or LGPL (http://www. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms.openssl. LOSS OF USE.html) software as part of its firmware. with or without modification. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING.GPL/LGPL This product contains GPL (http://www. EXEMPLARY. INCIDENTAL. redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL/LGPL.openssl.org/licenses/ lgpl.org/)” 4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.com/gpl/. Open SSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. xxxi . OR PROFITS. All rights reserved. WHETHER IN CONTRACT.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. DES. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.com) All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. If this package is used in a product. INCIDENTAL. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. SPECIAL.. LOSS OF USE. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. STRICT LIABILITY. DATA.e. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.com)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). Copyright remains Eric Young’s. etc.] xxxii . this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. i. INDIRECT. be it the RC4. INCLUDING. lhash. code. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. not just the SSL code. Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. 4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgment: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). RSA. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice. and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. OR PROFITS. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES. with or without modification. The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. EXEMPLARY.com). This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. WHETHER IN CONTRACT.Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery. Under the terms of this License Agreement.A. 4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces. the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications. 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts. 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. Monotype Imaging retains all rights. scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. lost data. By opening this diskette package. or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits. 2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights.227-19 (c)(2). are excluded. alter. unless sooner terminated. 6 You agree that you will not modify. 11 Use. or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces. errors and omissions. title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. xxxiii . You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original. upon their return to Monotype Imaging. sell. understand it.S. When this License expires or is terminated. 5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces. and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability. 3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging. disassemble. numerals. as appropriate.Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers. Further use. duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52. 9 Massachusetts U. machine readable. reverse engineer or decompile the Software. subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii). law governs this Agreement. you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. The parties agree that all other warranties. duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. except that you may make one backup copy. you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 10 You shall not sublicense. lease. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs. you need to acquire a multi- user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. expressed or implied. and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. decrypt. or any other incidental or consequential damages. styles and versions of letters. you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.

0) Apache License Version 2. . REPRODUCTION. and conversions to other media types. AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions. whether by contract or otherwise.0. and configuration files. DATA. LOSS OF USE. “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms. documentation source. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES. All rights reserved. For the purposes of this definition. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: .org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE. January 2004 http://www. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. including but not limited to software source code. including but not limited to compiled object code. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. “Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form. or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. INCLUDING.org Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. with or without modification.apache. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. “Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. WHETHER IN CONTRACT. and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. http://www. are controlled by. SPECIAL. OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING. STRICT LIABILITY.knopflerfish. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT.Knopflerfish License This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project. or are under common control with that entity. BUT NOT LIMITED TO. INDIRECT. “License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use. “Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. EXEMPLARY. .Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. “control” means (i) the power. OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE. xxxiv . Apache License (Version 2. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. generated documentation. OR PROFITS. direct or indirect. to cause the direction or management of such entity. “Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications. reproduction. INCIDENTAL.

The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium. within a display generated by the Derivative Works. made available under the License. but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution. the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work. xxxv . publicly display. that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions. or. an original work of authorship. if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. “Work” shall mean the work of authorship. prepare Derivative Works of. as a whole. whether in Source or Object form. offer to sell. all copyright. within the Source form or documentation. and issue tracking systems that are managed by. and otherwise transfer the Work. import. or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License. then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file. and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work. and (b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files. whether in Source or Object form. 3 Grant of Patent License. “Derivative Works” shall mean any work. or on behalf of. in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute. verbal. provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof. have made. no-charge. non-exclusive. and (d)If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution. with or without modifications. annotations. or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of. trademark. royalty-free.” “Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual. and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. if provided along with the Derivative Works. sell. alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work. and in Source or Object form. 4 Redistribution. For the purposes of this definition. worldwide. elaborations. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement. use. non-exclusive. patent. sublicense. and (c)You must retain. irrevocable copyright license to reproduce. royalty-free. publicly perform. source code control systems. Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from. including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists. or other modifications represent. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License. “submitted” means any form of electronic. “Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship. irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make. 2 Grant of Copyright License. no-charge. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute. provided that You meet the following conditions: (a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License. in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works. the Work and Derivative Works thereof. excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works. each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual. excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works. where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. worldwide. For the purposes of this License. as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

6 Trademarks. shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use. acceptance of support. or for any such Derivative Works as a whole. 7 Disclaimer of Warranty. MERCHANTABILITY. without any additional terms or conditions. or distribution of Your modifications. including. Unless You explicitly state otherwise. You may choose to offer.0 (the “License”). WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND. except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. either express or implied. unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing. defend. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof. not on behalf of any other Contributor. 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing. software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS. Version 2. and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by. Notwithstanding the above. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License. work stoppage. service marks. any warranties or conditions of TITLE. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names. even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. without limitation. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. In no event and under no legal theory. warranty. and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. contract. with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. in accepting such obligations. and charge a fee for. xxxvi .org/licenses/LICENSE-2. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. computer failure or malfunction. such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. indemnity. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. either express or implied. WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND. 5 Submission of Contributions. or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill. attach the following boilerplate notice. 8 Limitation of Liability. and only if You agree to indemnify. provided Your use. You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility. including any direct. nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. To apply the Apache License to your work. reproduction. or otherwise. NON-INFRINGEMENT. Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS. trademarks. special. reproduction. incidental. or any and all other commercial damages or losses). any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License. indirect. or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. However. whether in tort (including negligence). or claims asserted against. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www. or product names of the Licensor. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing.apache.

or 60 minutes (for the 45 ppm or 55 ppm model) have passed since the device was last used. Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program. as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types. Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 2 minutes have passed since the device was last used. For example. For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used. For more information see Duplex on page 3-12. it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9. Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 45 minutes (for the 35 ppm model). Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. xxxvii . by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment.

Chapter 7 . Chapter 10 . Chapter 6 .Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying. Chapter 5 . placing originals. xxxviii .Default Setting (System Menu) Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation. Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine. Chapter 11 .Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying. Chapter 3 .Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages.Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. connecting the machine.Printing Describes the functions you can use when printing originals. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Chapter 9 .Management Explains user login administration and job accounting.Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement.Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals. paper jams and other problems.Preparation before Use Explains adding paper. Chapter 4 . Appendix Explains how to enter characters. Chapter 1 . and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 8 . Also includes a glossary of terms.About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes. and lists the machine specifications. Chapter 12 .Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. printing and scanning. Chapter 2 . Provides information on media types and paper sizes.

 Press [Change] of Original Image. Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT: problems. and then Press [Next] of Quick Setup. keys or a computer screen. [ ] twice. Used to emphasize a key word. [Regular] Indicates the touch panel keys. Convention Description Example Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key. xxxix .Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. on the touch panel.  Press [ ] twice. additional information. Press [Copy]. Press [OK]. For more information refer to Sleep and phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2-9. [Change] of Original Image. continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows: Description in this Actual procedure Operation Guide Press [Copy]. Note Indicates supplemental information or operations for NOTE: reference. Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or CAUTION: machine breakdown and how to deal with it. [Next] of Quick  Setup. Description of Operation Procedure In this Operation Guide. Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed.

B6-R. Horizontal direction A4-R.Originals and Paper Sizes This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes. B5. As with A4. A6. * The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. Placement direction Indicated size * Vertical direction A4. horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper. dimension A is longer than B. B6. 16K. 16K- R. A6-R. Placement direction Originals Paper Vertical direction Horizontal direction xl . dimension A is shorter than B. B5-R. For further details. A5. A5-R. Icons on the Touch Panel The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel. refer to the page detailing that function or source tray. Letter-R. which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction. B5 and Letter. Letter. Statement Original Paper For the originals/paper. Statement-R Original Paper For the originals/paper.

..................... • Operation Panel ........1-2 • Machine ........................................................................................1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys............1-4 1-1 .................................................

and print data receiving. Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk. Displays help guidance. Returns settings to their default states. Displays the FAX screen. Displays the Application screen. Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen. scan send. Displays the System Menu. fax memory or USB memory (general-purpose item). Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped. Displays the Document Box screen. Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the Copy screen or Send screen. Displays the screen for sending. Displays the Copy screen. Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned. Blinks during printing. You can also change this to show the address book screen. Displays the Program screen. 1-2 . fax sending and receiving.

and finalizes screen during setting of functions. Enter numbers and symbols. Part Names Clears entered numbers and characters. Lit when the machine's main power is on. 1 Pauses the printing job in progress. Operates linked with the on-screen [OK]. 1-3 . Numeric keys. Puts the machine into Low Power Mode. Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Finalizes numeric key entry. Perform user switching authentication and logout. Displays the Interrupt Copy screen. Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode. Recalls already registered destinations and programs for sending.

Part Names Machine 1 2 3 5-e 5 4 5-b 5-c 5-d 5-a 5-g 5-f 1 Original Cover (Option) 2 Mailbox (Option) 3 Front Cover 4 Document Finisher (Option) 5 Cassette 1 to 5 (Cassette 3 to 5 are Options) • 5-a: Cassette 1 • 5-b: Cassette 2 • 5-c: Cassette 3 • 5-d: Cassette 4 • 5-e: Cassette 5 • 5-f: Cassette 3 • 5-g: Cassette 4 1-4 .

Part Names 13 1 10 14 6 15 7 11 16 8 12 9 22 21 17 18 19 20 6 Network Interface Connector 21 Waste Toner Tray 7 USB Port (A2) 22 Toner Container Release Lever 8 USB Interface Connector (B1) 9 Option Interface 10 Original Size Indicator Plates 11 Slit Glass 12 Toner Container (Black) 13 Document Processor (Option) 14 Platen 15 Clip Holder 16 Operation Panel 17 Handles 18 Release button 19 Waste Toner Box 20 Cleaning Brush 1-5 .

Part Names 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 32 33 34 35 30 36 37 38 31 23 Paper Length Guide 24 (Paper Width Guide) Lock 25 Inner Tray 26 USB Port (A1) 27 Right Cover 1 Lever 28 Right Cover 1 29 Main Power Switch 30 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 31 Handle 32 Right Cover 2 Lever 33 Right Cover 2 34 Paper Width Guide 35 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 36 Multi Purpose Tray 37 Right Cover 3 Lever 38 Right Cover 3 1-6 .

........................2-43 2-1 ............................................................................................................................................2-24 • Loading Paper.....................................2-27 • Loading Originals .....................................................................................................2-10 • Switching the Language for Display [Language]...................................................................2-10 • Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle .................................2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading paper and originals...........2-3 • Connecting Cables.........................................................................................................2-5 • Power On/Off .........................................................................2-12 • Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ...................................................2-11 • Setting Date and Time ...................................2-9 • Sleep and Auto Sleep ...................2-7 • Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode .........................................2-16 • Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail).......... • Check the Accessories .........2-2 • Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............................................................2-13 • Installing Software........

Documents Operation Guide (This Guide) FAX Operation Guide Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide Command Center RX Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide File Management Utilitiy User Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 2-2 . Documents Contained in the Included DVD The following documents are contained in the included DVD (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Preparation before Use Check the Accessories Check that the following accessories are included. • Safety Guide • Quick Guide • DVD (Product Library) • CD-ROM (TWAIN compatible application)* * This accessory is not included in some countries and regions.

MFP Printing Network Send SMB USB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC. User and Sends the image data destination registration of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E-mail message. Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network. Scanner default settings. Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (1000BASE-T. Connection Example 2 Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below. 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) Command Center RX Network Send E-mail Administrator’s PC Network settings. FAX TWAIN Scanning FAX (Option) Network WIA Scanning Network TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices. 2-3 . Network Network FAX Network Network (Option) Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP. and prepare the necessary cables.

5. Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Max. refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide. Shielded) * Function available when using optional fax kit.0 m. For details on Network FAX. 1000BASE-T Shielded) Printer USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant. 2-4 . Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use. Available Standard Interfaces Function Interface Necessary Cable Printer/Scanner Network interface LAN (10BASE-T or /Network FAX* 100BASE-TX.

After this. 4 Power on the machine. For details. Check that the Power indicator. 2-5 . refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-13. 2 1 When the machine is powered up. Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Connecting LAN Cable (Optional) Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine. 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub. the processing indicator and the memory indicator are off. turn off the main power switch. 2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector located on left side of the body. and configure the network. Make sure that lamps other than this lamp are off. first press the Power key on the operation panel.

Check that the Power indicator. 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC. 2-6 . turn off the main power switch. Make sure that lamps other than this lamp are off. Connecting the Power Cable Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet. After this. 2 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector (B1) located on the left side of the body. 1 When the machine is powered up. the processing indicator and the memory indicator are off. Preparation before Use Connecting USB Cable Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine. first press the Power key on the operation panel. IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch.. and then turn on the main power switch. Preparation before Use Power On/Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit. When the main power indicator is off. a message might display indicating the security function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on. Open the main power switch cover and turn the main power switch on. Wait more than 5 seconds. NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed. (Recovery from sleep) 2 Press the Power key.... 2-7 . do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.

the processing indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch. overnight). In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e. and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10. If the optional Fax kit is installed.g. Make sure that the Power key. 2-8 . If you will not switch of the main power switch. remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. the Processing indicator or Memory indicator is lit or blinking. Preparation before Use Power Off Before turning off the main power switch. note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception. Make sure that lamps other than this lamp are off. CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key. vacation). refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9. press the Power key on the operation panel to off. turn it off at the main power switch.g. CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e. Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.

Touch panel and all indicators on the operation 2 panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver. press the Energy Saver key. Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax. Power. may cause the machine to respond more slowly. • Press any key on the operation panel. such as ventilation. the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. The machine will be ready within 10 seconds. Note that ambient environmental conditions. the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. and main power indicators. Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time. To resume. Preparation before Use Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode. perform one of the following actions. The default preset time is 2 minutes. If print data is received during Low Power Mode. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. • Open the platen cover or the optional document processor. 2-9 . • Place originals in the optional document processor.

This status is referred to as Sleep. To resume. press the Power key. Note that ambient environmental conditions. the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit. When using the optional fax. press the Power key. Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever. The machine will be ready within 23 seconds. such as ventilation. 2-10 . may cause the machine to respond more slowly. If print data is received during Sleep. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. Preparation before Use Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep To enter Sleep. or 60 minutes (for the 45 ppm or 55 ppm model). Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode. The default preset time is 45 minutes (for the 35 ppm model). received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit.

Language 3 Press the key for the language you want to use. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language. Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display [Language] Select the language displayed on the touch panel. Set the language to use for the touch panel display. The touch panel language will be changed. Common Settings . 2-11 . English Deutsch Français Español Italiano Nederlands Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ Português Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [OK]. Use the procedure below to select the language. 2 1 Press the System Menu key.

Press [+] or [–] in each Set the date and time. Date/Timer . 1/13 -10:00 Hawaii -09:00 Alaska NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize -08:00 Baja California summer time. If user login administration is disabled. refer to Optional Function on page 9-107. If you change Date/Time setting. the summer time setting screen will not Cancel OK appear. 7 Press [OK]. Set time zone.Time Zone 3 Select the region. Enter a login user name and password. setting. trial functions will be unavailable. Set the date. 2 Press [ ]. the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. the user authentication screen appears. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. For details.Date/Time 6 Set the date and time. -12:00 International Date Line West -11:00 Samoa -11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11 4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK]. Date/Timer . When you send an E-mail using the transmission function. 2010 10 10 Year Month Day Off 10 Hour 10 Minute 31 Second Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2-12 . 1 Press the System Menu key. time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used. Time Zone NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to view the next region. Select the location nearest you. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password. Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Press [Change] of Date/Time. and press [Login]. [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.

* The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. • TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup. TCP/IP (IPv6). Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password. Use the procedure below.IPv4 6 Press [DHCP].0. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.0. For other network settings. NetWare and other platforms. 7 Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].. obtain permission from the network administrator.0 Subnet Mask 0. DHCP: On. If user login administration is disabled. 4 Press [On] and then press [OK].. and press [Login]. Status 12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address using the numeric keys. 2 Press [System]. Auto-IP: On". Set the IP addresses. 2 This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. and AppleTalk. IP Address 0. TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network. Set TCP/IP (IPv4). IPSec. 3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP. 5 Press [Change] of IPv4.2-13 • AppleTalk Setup.0. On Default Gateway 0. System .0 8 Press [Bonjour]. IPX/SPX.0. NetBEUI.. NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On.0 9 Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK]. 2-13 . [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4). Off Off On 10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the DHCP Bonjour Auto-IP numeric keys. Enter a login user name and password. Cancel OK 11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using 10/10/2010 10:10 the numeric keys.0. Macintosh. the user authentication screen appears. Preparation before Use Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) The machine is equipped with network interface. Bonjour: Off.0. 1 Press the System Menu key.. and gateway addresses. subnet masks. It enables network printing on the Windows. refer to the Network on 9-90.2-15 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. UNIX.

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP. DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. refer to Restart Network on page 9-101. restart the network from the system menu. For detailed information on restarting the network. 4 Press [On] and then press [OK]. or turn the machine OFF and then ON. Preparation before Use 13 Check if all the address entries are correct and press [OK]. 2 Press [System]. 2-14 . 7 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK]. 14 After changing the setting. restart the network from the system menu. [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. 1 Press the System Menu key. For detailed information on restarting the network. 5 Press [Change] of IPv4. 8 After changing the setting. Refer to Bonjour Settings on page 9-91 about the procedures. Use the procedure below. 6 Press [DHCP]. The default setting is Off. or turn the machine OFF and then ON. refer to Restart Network on page 9-101. Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is On.

7 Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK]. refer to Restart Network on page 9-101. Preparation before Use Auto-IP Settings Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. Use the procedure below. restart the network from the system menu. AppleTalk Setup Select the Apple Talk network connection. 5 Press [Change] of IPv4. For detailed information on restarting the network. The default setting is On. or turn the machine OFF and then ON. 4 Press [On] and then press [OK]. 2 Press [System]. The default setting is On. Refer to AppleTalk on page 9-95 about the procedures. 8 After changing the setting. 6 Press [Auto-IP]. 2-15 . 2 1 Press the System Menu key. 3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP. [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.

You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software.exe. 1 Insert the DVD. If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed. select Cancel. If the autorun screen is displayed. For details. The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality. Express Mode automatically detects connected machines and installs the required software. The following softwares are supported: • KX driver • KX (XPS) printer driver • Mini printer driver (PCL/KPDL) • TWAIN driver • WIA driver • Network FAX driver • File Management Utility • KM-NET for Direct Printing • KMnet Viewer • Font NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. refer to Custom Installation in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD. 2-16 . The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC. The WIA driver cannot be installed on Windows XP. If the user account management window appears. click Allow. Preparation before Use Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC. click Run Setup. follow the next steps to install the software. Installing Printer Driver in Windows NOTE: If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays.

Click Accept. 4 Click Express Mode. NOTE: If the print system detection window appears and the installer fails to detect the machine. 5 Select the print system to be installed and click Next. verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload. Preparation before Use 2 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement. 2-17 . 2 3 Click Install Software.

You can install the WIA driver using Custom Mode. If you are installing the TWAIN driver or WIA driver. if required. 2-18 . Preparation before Use 6 Customize the print system name if the print system is connected via a network and click Next. 7 Click Install. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. 8 A message appears saying that the printer has been installed successfully. Click Finish. Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the system. The TWAIN driver and WIA driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network. NOTE: If the Windows security window appears. click Install this driver software anyway. continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2- 22) or Setting WIA Driver (page 2-23).

4 Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.4 or higher depending on your Mac OS version. OS X 10. refer to Bonjour Settings on page 2-14. 1 Insert the DVD. refer to Printer on page 9-54. In the Authenticate screen.2 and 10. Preparation before Use Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer. The example shows you how to connect your machine to a Macintosh running MAC OS X v10.x.3 Only.6. Double-click the Kyocera icon. This completes the printer driver installation. 3 Double-click Kyocera OS X vx. 2 For details about the configuration method. NOTE: When printing from a Macintosh computer. For details. enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.4 Only or OS X 10. If connecting by Bonjour. 2 Double-click either OS X 10. enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system. 2-19 . set the machine’s emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

If an IP or AppleTalk connection is used. 2-20 . 5 Open System Preferences and click Print & Fax. the machine is automatically recognized and connected. select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Printer Name". Preparation before Use Next. If a USB connection is used. The driver with the same name as the machine automatically appears in "Driver". 7 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and then enter the IP address and printer name. the settings below are required. specify the print settings. Click Add. 6 Click the plus symbol (+). NOTE: When using a Bonjour connection.

Preparation before Use 8 Select the options available for the machine and click Continue 2 9 The selected machine is added. 2-21 .

and click OK. 8 To use job accounting. NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown. Preparation before Use Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. TWAIN Driver screen appears. select 6 the checkbox beside Authentication. 9 Click Close. select a model 4 name with (Box). Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver Setting. enter an Account ID (maximum of 8 digits). NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine. 8 Click OK. 7 7 When user login administration is enabled. To scan in a document stored in a custom box. 3 4 Select this machine from the list. and enter a Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters). All Programs. Click Edit to change names. 2 Click Add. contact the Administrator. 1 Select the Start Button of the Windows display. select the checkbox beside SSL. 2-22 . select the checkbox of the account. 5 5 Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the Scanner Address. 6 When using SSL. 3 Enter the machine name in the Name field.

The following explanation assumes that Windows 7 is being used. select the checkbox beside Account ID. Click Show scanners and cameras in the search list. select the checkbox beside SSL. and enter the account ID with as many as eight digits. 3 Enter the machine name or the host name. 3 4 When using SSL. 6 Click OK. select the checkbox beside Authentication. 6 When job accounting is enabled. and enter a Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and Password (up to 64 characters). 2 1 Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner in Program and File Search. Preparation before Use Setting WIA Driver Register this machine to the WIA Driver. 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers. 2-23 . and click Properties. The Scanners and Cameras screen appears. 5 4 5 When user login administration is enabled.

enter the machine’s IP address. 2-24 . The optional Fax Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality. Preparation before Use Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) Command Center RX is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security. e. The values for each category must be set separately. information on the FAX settings has been omitted.41/ The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status.51. 1 Launch your Web browser. NOTE: Here. refer to the Command Center RX Operation Guide. Login User Name: Admin Login Password: Admin The procedure for accessing Command Center RX is explained below. 2 In the Address or Location bar. E-mail transmission and advanced networking. For more information on using the FAX. you must log in as an administrator of the machine. To change settings in Command Center RX.183. enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page.g. network printing. 3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. For details. The default factory settings are set as shown below. If restrictions have been set for Command Center RX.) http://10. refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide.

Preparation before Use E-mail Setting Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments. The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below. this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. • If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages. 2-25 . 2 Before sending images scanned with this machine as E-mail attachments. check the following: • The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended. 1 Click Settings -> Advanced -> SMTP -> General. To use this function. it may not be possible to send very large E-mails. • SMTP Settings Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.

The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters. Item Description SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine. the password set here will be used for authentication. Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate. Authentication Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP Protocol as the protocol. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. To use E-mail. the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. POP before SMTP Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have Timeout selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol. The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab. Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. 3 Click Submit. SMTP Security Enables or disables the SMTP Security. a DNS server address must also be configured. the SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings. If entering the name. such as the machine administrator. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters. SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. 465 for SSL/TLS and 25 or 587 for STARTTLS are well-known SMTP ports. When the value is 0. SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds. Signature Enter the signature. SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000. either SSL/TLS or STARTTLS must be selected. You can also specify E-mail addresses. E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters. Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters. this protocol must be enabled. the limitation for E-mail size is disabled. To enable SMTP security. When this protocol is enabled. 2-26 . Typically. Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. It is often used for further identification of the machine. Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.

NOTE: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit. (Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults. align the paper on a level. do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name. Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. If that does not solve the problem. 3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the paper. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period. Paper feeders are also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).500-sheet x 2) 2-31 Cassette 5 Side Feeder (3. CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying). fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps. protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.000-sheet) 2-34 * The paper feed method is the same as standard cassettes 1 and 2. or change the orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the paper in the cassette. 1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle. 2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack risen. If you use special paper such as letterhead. flat table. 2 Cassette Name Page Standard Cassette 1. If the paper is curled or folded. turn the paper over in the cassette. IMPORTANT: • The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment. change the cassette paper type to custom 8. 4 Finally.) Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper. Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)* 2-28 Cassette 4 Large Capacity Feeder (1. For the paper feed methods for each cassette. Standard cassettes 2-28 Cassette 2 Multi Purpose Tray Multi Purpose Tray 2-35 Option Cassette 3. Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded in the two standard cassettes and the multi purpose tray. straighten it before loading. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality. 2-27 . • You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. refer to the page below. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam. refer to the Paper on Appendix-12. If the output paper scatters or stacks unevenly.

Media Type Setting on page 9-8. Ledger. NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2. A5-R. 16K-R and 216 × 340 mm. 2 Squeeze the ends of the bottom of the paper length guide and move the guide to fit the length of the paper. recycled paper or color paper.) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 220 g/m2. IMPORTANT: • When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper). A4-R. B5. Letter-R. 1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops. 12 × 18". Folio. 16K. Oficio II. 2-28 . A4. • Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 220256 g/m2. contact a service technician. 8K. NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time. Cassette 1 and 2 hold up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper). (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-39. set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using. always specify the media type and paper weight settings. B4. The following paper sizes are supported: A3. Statement-R. Letter. Legal. Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassettes The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper. • If you wish to use 330 × 210 mm to 356 × 220 mm paper. B5-R.

keep the side that was closest to the package seal facing up. • The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. IMPORTANT: • Before loading the paper. be sure that it is not curled or folded. Grasp the paper width adjusting tab and move the paper width guides to fit the paper. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams. 2 4 Align the paper flush against the right side of the cassette. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. After removing new paper from its packaging. • When loading the paper. 2-29 . Preparation before Use 3 Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to release the lock. • Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration on the left). If there is a gap. readjust the guides to fit the paper. (Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-27) Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. fan the paper before loading it in the cassette.

(The indication is printed on both sides of the sheet. etc. NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-39. recycled. 6 Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and type of paper to be placed. protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. Preparation before Use 5 Press the (Paper Width Guide) Lock to lock. 7 Gently push the cassette back in.) loaded in the cassette. 8 Select the media type (plain.) 2-30 .) NOTE: Fold the sheet in half and use with the side you want to display as the front side.

Paper Size Guide (A) 3 Insert the Paper Size Guide (A) into the slot (bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be used. Preparation before Use The Large Capacity Feeder (1. The Large Capacity Feeder (1.500-sheet x 2) (Option) The Optional cassettes will each hold plain paper. Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to verify that it is fixed. B5. Pull the Paper Size Guide (A) up and out.750-sheet x 2) of 64 g/m2 plain paper). 1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops. Make sure that the top of the paper size guide (A) matches the paper size to be used.) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 256 g/m2. Letter. always specify the media type and paper weight settings.000 sheets (1.500-sheet x 2) of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 3. 2-31 . recycled paper or color paper. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2.500 sheets (1. and rotate the clamp to lock it.500-sheet x 2) holds up to 3.Media Type Setting on page 9-8. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-39. set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using. If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 256 g/m2. attach the clamp. The following paper sizes are supported: A4. • Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 256 g/m2 in the cassettes. 2 Rotate the Paper Size Guide (A) clamp and Clamp remove. 2 IMPORTANT: • When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper).

press the hook on the side of the Paper Size Guide (B) to release it and pull out the Paper Size Guide (B). Paper Size Guide (B) 5 Adjust the Paper Size Guide (B) to the paper size. Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to verify that it is fixed. Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to verify that it is fixed. 2-32 . B5 Open the Paper Size Guide (B) as shown. and lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound). insert into the slot marked B5 (on the bottom of the cassette). Preparation before Use 4 With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way down. Letter The Paper Size Guide (B) is not attached. and lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound). A4 Insert the Paper Size Guide (B) into the slot marked A4 (on the bottom of the cassette).

fan the paper before loading it in the cassette. • Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below). NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period. 9 Select the media type (plain. (The indication is printed on both sides of the sheet. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-39. (Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-27) 2 IMPORTANT: • Before loading the paper. protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. • When loading the paper. keep the print side facing up. etc. 8 Gently push the cassette back in. 7 Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and type of paper to be placed.) loaded in the cassette. Preparation before Use 6 Insert the paper into the cassette. be sure that it is not curled or folded.) NOTE: Fold the sheet in half and use with the side you want to display as the front side. recycled.) 2-33 . After removing new paper from its packaging.

Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops and insert the paper into the cassette. keep the print side facing up. gently push the cassette back in.000-sheet) (Option) The optional side feeder hold up to 3.000 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). NOTE: The default paper size setting is A4. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. Letter. Preparation before Use Side Feeder (3. 2-34 . If you need the paper size changed to B5 or Letter. be sure that it is not curled or folded. • When loading the paper. B5. IMPORTANT: • Before loading the paper. contact your service representative. • Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below). The following paper sizes are supported: A4. After loading paper.

8K. The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows. enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41. 16K and 16K-R. Youkei 4. Envelope C4. Media Type Setting on page 9-8. Monarch. Youkei 2: 10 sheets • Long documents: 470. set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using. The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to A6-R and Hagaki and from Ledger to 2 Statement-R. Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 150sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 165 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 55 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper) lager than A4. recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper :165 sheets) • B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2). recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper :55 sheets) • Hagaki: 30 sheets • OHP film: 10 sheets • Envelope DL. • A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2). Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper. 1 Open the Multi Purpose tray until it stops. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41. IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper). always specify the media type and paper weight settings.0 mm (48"): 1 sheet NOTE: When you load custom size paper.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more. extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray until the mark "∆" is fully appeared. 2-35 . 2 When loading paper sizes 12×18" and from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6). Envelope C5. select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41.

Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper. first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray. IMPORTANT: Keep the print side facing up. After removing new paper from its packaging. If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more. fan the paper before loading it in the multi-purpose tray. readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. (Refer to Before Loading Paper on page 2-27) 4 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. 2-36 . Curled paper must be uncurled before use. IMPORTANT: Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration). When loading paper into the multi purpose tray. check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper.

2 Acceptable Envelope Size Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2" Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2" Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8" Envelope #6 (Commercial #6) 3 5/8"×6 1/2" Envelope DL 110×220 (mm) Envelope C4 229×324 (mm) Envelope C5 162×229 (mm) Youkei 2 162×114 (mm) Youkei 4 235×105 (mm) 1 Open the multi purpose tray. Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows. 2-37 . 2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope. Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.

Return Cardstock Portrait Landscape postcard (Hagaki) form form (Oufuku envelopes envelopes hagaki) Open the flap. IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Preparation before Use 3 Insert along the paper width guide all the way in as shown.g. select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41. the flap. Close e. Be sure to load it in correctly. 2-38 . IMPORTANT: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku hagaki). When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelopes with the print side facing down.) When printing the address. NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray. otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

(Refer to 2 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-39. specify the media type setting. Letter. the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. ** To change to a media type other than Plain. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41. Oficio II Metric models: A3. • Rough: Heavy 4. Bond. A5-R. or Extra Heavy *** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. Color. Prepunched***. Statement-R. A4. specify the paper size and media type setting. Selection Item Selectable Size/Type Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.) To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray. Heavy 5. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. 12×18". Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less). Inch models: A3. 216×340 mm Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1. A4-R. or Heavy 5 • Thick: Heavy 4. Letter-R. Letter. Letter. Oficio II. Plain. Preprinted***. refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. Thick. 16K-R Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less). B5-R. for the multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 to 5) is [Auto]. Folio. Standard Select from the standard sizes. Select whether the Size paper is in Metric size or in Inch size. A4. B5. if you use a media type other than plain paper. or Heavy 5 • Preprinted: Heavy 4. B5. Color**. Recycled. Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media (Cassette Setting) The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2. 16K. specify the paper size. Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2-39 . 16K-R Metric models: Ledger. the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected. B4. 8K. and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1. Letterhead***. Recycled.500- sheet x 2)is used. Legal. To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes. Vellum. Rough. refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11. When the paper weight settings shown below are selected. specify the paper size setting. Folio. 8K. High Quality. or Heavy 5 • Letterhead: Heavy 4. Legal. B5-R. Sizes 1* Inch models: Ledger. NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed. Bond**. B4. or Heavy 5 • Bond: Heavy 4 • Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 4. Sizes 2* Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Letter-R. A5-R. 16K. High Quality and Custom 1~8** * Only A4. 12×18". Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**.) Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeders (cassettes 3 to 5). and the default media type setting is [Plain]. Statement-R. Also. A4-R.

(refer to page 9-6) Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2-40 . change the Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality cassette paper type to custom 8. or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size. NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed. Then press [Change] of Paper Size. Common Settings . press [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit. 5 Press [OK]. 4 For automatic detection of the paper size. Then press [OK]. select one of [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 5] and press [Next].Paper Size To select the paper size.Media Type 6 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the Select type of paper in Cassette 1. media type. Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key. The previous screen reappears. or curling causes Recycled Preprinted Bond Color paper-over in the Inner Tray too quickly. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Plain Rough Vellum NOTE: If the output paper curls. press [Standard Sizes 1] Set cassette paper size. [Next] of Cassette Setting. Auto A3 A4 A4 A5 Standard B4 B5 B5 216x340mm Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Common Settings . [Next] of Original / Paper Settings. 3 Cassette Setting.

Color. A6-R. High Quality. B4. Cardstock. Letterhead**. Letter. Recycled. B5. B5-R. Rough and Custom 1 to 8 2-41 . A5-R. Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). A6-R. Color. refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. A4-R. Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray. refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11. High Quality and Custom 1~8 * To change to a media type other than Plain. 216×340 mm Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1. Envelope C4. Folio. Vellum.When using other than a plain paper. Letter-R. B5. Envelope Monarch. Plain (105g /m2 or less). Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less). Folio. Youkei 2 Size Enter the size not included in the standard size. Youkei 4. Envelope. Transparency. Prepunched**. Sizes 2 Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Cardstock. Labels. 2 Item Description Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.83~17. Labels. Thick (106 g/m2 and more). 16K. specify the media type. Coated. Envelope C5. Plain. Hagaki. Bond. Y (Vertical): 3. B6-R. Coated. Oufuku hagaki. Legal. NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX. Entry Selectable paper sizes are as follows. 12×18". 12×18". B4.86~11. Bond. Oficio II. 16K-R Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.01" increments). 8K. Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments) Media Type Selectable media types are as follows. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Statement-R. Letter-R. 8K. Oficio II. the available media types are as shown below.00" (in 0. Standard Select from the standard sizes.69" (in 0. Thick. Select whether the Size paper is in Metric size or in Inch size. Executive Metric models: A3. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Statement-R. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). Rough. Recycled.01" increments) Metric size X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments). Envelope DL. Preprinted**. Legal. Envelope. Inch size X (Horizontal): 5. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4). Inch models: A3. 16K-R Metric models: Ledger. ** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. ISO B5. B6-R. 16K. B5-R. Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger. A5-R. A4. specify the paper size. A4-R. A4. Executive. Letter.

[Next] of MP Tray Setting. press [+] or [–] to Set the multi-purpose tray paper size. Auto Standard Sizes 1 X(148 . press any of [Standard Auto A3 A4 A4 A5 Sizes 1]. Preparation before Use 1 Press the System Menu key. Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick Coated High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2-42 . [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit. and then [Change] of Paper Size. [Others] or [Size Standard Sizes 1 A6 B4 B5 B5 Entry] and select the paper size. The previous screen reappears. Standard B6 216x340mm Sizes 2 Others Size Entry Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Common Settings . 2 Press [Common Settings].Paper Size 3 For automatic detection of the paper size. media type. You may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].432) Y(98 .Media Type 5 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray. [Standard Sizes 2]. press Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.Paper Size If you have chosen [Size Entry]. 297 mm 210 mm Standard Sizes 2 Others # Keys # Keys Size Entry Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Common Settings . enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. Then press [OK]. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings.297) 4 Press [OK]. Common Settings . To select the paper size.

do so with the platen Cover or the optional document processor in the open position. sending or storing. Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying. be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table. 2-43 . Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. 2 Place the original. Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals. Placing Originals on the Platen 2 You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened. NOTE: For details on Original Orientation. refer to When placing originals on the platen on page 4-9. When placing books or magazines on the machine. 1 Open the platen Cover or the optional document processor. NOTE: Before opening the document processor.

Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. IMPORTANT: Do not push the platen cover forcefully when you close it. 2-44 . CAUTION: Do not leave the platen cover or the optional document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury. Preparation before Use  Original size indicator plates (Inch models) (Metric models) 3 Close the platen Cover or the optional document processor.

wrinkles or creases before loading. High Quality: 100 sheets Recycled paper. Document Processor Document Processor (Dual scan DP) Weight 45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2) 35 to 220 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2) Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R Capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2). • Soft originals such as vinyl sheets • Transparencies such as OHP film • Carbon paper • Originals with very slippery surfaces • Originals with adhesive tape or glue • Wet originals • Originals with correction fluid which is not dried • Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals • Originals with cut-out sections • Crumpled paper • Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Colored paper. 2-45 . • Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls. Part Names of the Document Processor 2 (1) (1) Original placement indicator (2) (2) Top cover (3) (3) Original width guides (4) (4) Original table (5) Original eject table (5) (6) Original stopper (6) (7) Opening handle (7) Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). Plain paper (80 g/m2). Colored paper. Recycled paper. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). High Quality: 175 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets) (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets) Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets Thick paper (157 g/m2): 89 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets Thick paper (120 g/m2): 116 sheets Art paper: 1 sheet Art paper: 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals.

Preparation before Use How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals. refer to When placing originals on the optional document processor on page 4-9. Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. NOTE: For details on Original Orientation. 1 Adjust the original width guides. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam. 2 Place the originals. The original placement indicator will be lit. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. If there is a gap. readjust the original width guides. IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. The gap may cause the originals to jam. 2-46 . Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first). Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure).

Indications and their status are as follows. • Green blinking: Original is not placed properly. Remove and place again. 2 • Green lit: Original is placed properly. 2-47 . Preparation before Use Original placement indicator The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed.

Preparation before Use 2-48 .

.............................3-57 • Using the Internet Browser ............................................................3-52 • Program .............3-61 • Help Screen .................. Send....................3-6 • Copying........................................................................................................................... Search key .................................................................................................3-51 • Quick Setup Screen .......................................................3-28 • Preparation for sending a document to a PC.............3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations.......................................................................................... and Document Box Settings) ........................3-60 • Checking Counter ................................3-39 • Using the Document Box ....................3-58 • Using Weekly Timer ................................................................................................3-7 • Sending.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. • Login/Logout ..................3-22 • Confirmation Screen of Destinations ........................3-4 • Touch Panel Display ..............................................3-42 • Canceling Jobs ..............................................................................................3-29 • Specifying Destination ..............3-55 • Registering Shortcuts (Copy...............3-2 • Enter key and Quick No..........................3-61 3-1 ..3-5 • Original Preview......................................................................................

Login 1 If the screen shown appears during operations. NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method. login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password. Login to: Local Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the Login User Name abcdef numeric keys. In this event. and press [Login]. 5 Check the login user name and password are correct. Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys. NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine. 4 Enter the password and press [OK]. on page 10-12. 3-2 . press [Login User Name]. Enter login user name and password. the Authentication/Logout key must be pressed when logging in. 3 Press [Login Password]. # Keys Login Password ******** # Keys ID Card Login Check Counter Cancel Login Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2 Enter the login user name and press [OK]. either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication type. If the guest authentication setting is enabled. Basic Operation Login/Logout If user login administration is enabled. NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. For details. refer to the Guest Authorization Set.

1/2 For details. press the Authentication/ Logout key to return to the login user name/login password entry screen. • When the machine is placed in Low Power Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key. select a Select the user to login. • When Auto Low Power Mode is activated. an input screen will be displayed. • When the auto panel reset function is activated. A B C NOTE: If a login password is required. 01 02 03 No. 3-3 . 3 Keyboard Login Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Logout To logout from the machine. Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances: • When the machine is put to Sleep by pressing the Power key. user and log in. Basic Operation Simple Login If this screen is displayed during operations. • When the Auto Sleep function is activated. refer to the Simple Login on page 10-17.

The Enter symbol ( ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e. The basic send Status 10/10/2010 10:10 screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list.g. A4 Preview Plain Paper Set. 3-4 . Search ( ) key Use the Quick No. such as [OK] and [Close].]) in the basic send screen. Using the Enter ( ) key The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel. press the key for the cassette containing the required paper size. The use of the Quick No. Paper Selection Auto The Enter ( ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the Cassette touch panel. Destination 2 In the number entry screen. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing.com 1/1 E-mail 3 If you entered a speed dial number between 1 and Enter One Touch key number using # keys. C OFFICE Folder Path (0001 . AAA BBB i-FAX Cancel OK Addr Entry 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100 NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number. Plain A3 A4 MP Tray Original : A4 Plain Plain 2 To copy using the selected paper. refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-39. 1 Press the Quick No. you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number.] displayed on the touch panel.1000) Entry On Hook Direct 0011 FAX No. For details of the procedure. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Using the Quick No. Copies 1 In the paper selection screen. Search key This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. indicating that the Enter key performs A4 the same action as [OK]. The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example./Sending Data Format Color/ Image Quality Advanced Setup Program operation in step 3 can be omitted. Basic Operation Enter key and Quick No. For example. [ OK]. to enter the speed dial number. [ Close]). press the Enter key (or [OK]). press the Enter A4 Zoom Paper : 100% : A4 Plain MP Tray key (or [OK]). use the numeric keys Place original. Addr Entry 3 digits long. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. refer to Paper Selection on page 4-3. Destination Detail Address Book A OFFICE B OFFICE abcd@efg. Search key performs the same action as the [No. Search key (or [No. the WSD Scan FFF GGG HHH III JJJ Destination Quick Setup Org. Search key on the operation panel. The specified destination appears in the 0001 Entry destination list. The Quick No.

the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. press the Reset key and try again. the key is Cannot be used because an grayed out and cannot be option is not installed. Check with the administrator of the machine. 3-5 . If the key is still grayed out after the Reset key is pressed./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Remaining amount of toner Display of keys that cannot be set Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-selectable state. (Refer to Original Preview on page 3-6) NOTE: If a key that you wish to use is grayed out. it is possible that you are prohibited from using the function by user control. is already selected. Basic Operation Touch Panel Display Display for Originals and Paper The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray. • [Preview] has been pressed. Copies Press [Cancel] to change settings. Press Start key to start printing. Normal Grayed out Hidden Off Off Off Off Off Off Combine Staple Combine Staple Combine Staple /Punch /Punch /Punch In the following cases. combination with a feature that [Staple/Punch] does not appear. selected. • Use prohibited by user control. 3 Copy Image Original Shortcut 1 Output position tray Shortcut 2 Paper Shortcut 3 source Auto 100% Normal 0 Size/orientation of Shortcut 4 original and paper Original : A4 Paper Zoom Density Selection Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5 Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off >>1-sided Cancel Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 /Punch Quick Setup Org. In this case. Example: • Cannot be used in When a finisher is not installed.

When scanning is completed. press the Start key. Shortcut 3 Auto 100% Normal 0 Shortcut 4 NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original. the preview image appears on the panel. Copies 2 Press [Preview]. Copies 4 To change the quality or the layout. Basic Operation Original Preview You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel. 1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the platen. The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below. Copying begins. refer to Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details on page 3-48. press [Cancel] Press [Cancel] to change settings. Zoom Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off >>1-sided Cancel Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 /Punch Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 If there is no problem with the preview image. 3-6 . Copy Image Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Auto 100% Normal 0 Shortcut 4 Paper Zoom Density Original : A4 Selection Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5 Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off >>1-sided Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 /Punch Quick Setup Org. Change the settings and press Copy Image Shortcut 1 [Preview] again to see a preview image with the Shortcut 2 new settings. Press Start key to start printing. only the first Original : A4 : 100% Paper Selection Zoom Density Shortcut 5 page is previewed. or the Stop key. The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3 The machine starts scanning the original. NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box.

press. NOTE: For loading instructions. [Paper Selection] and select the desired Auto 100% Normal 0 Shortcut 4 paper source. Shortcut 2 To change the paper size. Specify the desired number up to 999./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. 1 Press the Copy key. 5 Press the Start key to start copying. Paper Zoom Density Original : A4 Selection Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5 Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off >>1-sided Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 /Punch Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Shortcut 3 Finishing]. Paper that matches the size of the Copy Image Shortcut 1 original will be selected automatically. Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying. press the Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the 3 machine to warm up. NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off. Copies 3 Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel. 3-7 . refer to Loading Originals on page 2-43. 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor. [Org.

Copies 4 Adjust density pressing [-3] (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker). 3-8 . 5 Press [OK].5 +0.5 +1. 1 Press the Copy key.5 +2. 3 Set the original on the platen and press [Image Quality] -> [Density].5 -0. Lighter Normal Darker -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 Original : A4 Zoom : 100% -2. Basic Operation Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below. You can adjust density using 7 or 13 levels. You can change the density level [-3] Density (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Copying begins.5 -1.5 Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press the Start key.

Basic Operation

Original Image
Select image quality suited to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.

Image Quality Option
Description
Original Image Original Type 3
Printer Output For mixed text and photo documents
printed on this machine originally.
Text+Photo
Book/Magazine For mixed text and photos printed in a
magazine, etc.
Printer Output For photos printed on this machine
originally.
Photo Book/Magazine For photos printed in a magazine, etc.
Photo Paper Suitable for photographs taken with a
camera.
Off For documents that are mostly text and
(original type not set) were originally printed on this machine.
Text
On Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
(original type is set)
Printer Output For maps and diagrams printed on this
machine originally.
Graphic/Map
Book/Magazine For maps and diagrams printed in a
magazine.

The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Image
Quality] -> [Original Image].

Copies 4 Select Original Type.

Original Image 5 Press [OK].
Original Type
Text+Photo

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Photo
Book
Printer Output /Magazine
Text

Original : A4 Graphic
/Map
Zoom : 100%
Paper : A4

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

3-9

Basic Operation

Zoom
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.

Auto Zoom
Ledger: 129 % Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R

A3: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A4

A5: 70 %

Manual Zoom
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %

400 %

Preset Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

The following magnifications are available.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Inch Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>
Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>
Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>
Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>
Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)

Metric Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>
A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),
75% (11×15" >> A4),
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)

Metric Models (Asia 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
Pacific) 141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,
A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%
(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>
A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%
(Min.)

3-10

Basic Operation

XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.

Y

3
X

The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/
Edit] -> [Zoom].

Copies 4 Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.

Zoom
(25 - 400)
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
Standard
Zoom 400 %
magnification as desired. You can also enter the
XY Zoom 400%
Max.
86%
A3>>B4
A4>>B5
magnification directly using the numeric keys by
200%
A5>>A3
# Keys 81% 81%
pressing [# Keys].
A4>>A3 100% 70% A3>>A4
141%

Original : A4
A5>>A4 A4>>A5
When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired
A4>>B4 Auto
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: A4
122%
A5>>B5
50%
magnification.
115%
B4>>A3 25% Min.
Preview B5>>A4

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

Copies When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].

Zoom Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
(25 - 400)
Standard
Zoom
X
100 %
magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
XY Zoom You can also enter the magnification directly using
# Keys
the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].
(25 - 400)
Y

Original : A4
100 %
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
Top Edge
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: A4
on Top the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation on Left]. Then press [OK].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-11

Basic Operation

Duplex
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
5
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
4 5 last copy will be blank.
3 3

4
2 1
2

1

Original Copy

The following binding options are available.
ghi A B
ghi
def ghi
abc
abc
abc
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
def

the second sides are not rotated.
def
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
Original Copy second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when
turning the pages.

Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
1 1 2
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
2

required.

Original Copy
The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides
are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.

Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
5 5
3 3
The optional document processor and the Expansion
Memory are required.
4

4

1 1
2

2

NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to
Original Copy Two-sided are A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Statement-
R, Oficio II, 216×340mm and Folio.

3-12

Basic Operation

Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book
1 2 1 2 original.

The following binding options are available.

Original Copy • Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are
copied from left to right.
• Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are 3
copied from right to left.

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-
sided. Original: A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger,
Letter-R and 8K. Paper: A4, B5, Letter and 16K. You
may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to
match that size.

Book to Two-sided

Facing pages Facing pages Produces two-sided copies from an open book original
-> Two-sided -> Facing pages with facing pages.
3
1 2 3 4 1 2
4

3
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
1
0
2

supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: A3,
3 B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K. Paper:
2 1 4 3 2 1
4

1 0
A4, B5 and Letter.
3
2

Original Copy

The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].

Copies 4 Select the desired Duplex option.

Duplex 5 If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or
1-sided
>>1-sided [2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
1-sided
>>2-sided
finished copies of Finishing.
2-sided
>>1-sided
Finishing
If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2-
2-sided

Original : A4
>>2-sided sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the
Book Top Edge
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: A4
>>1-sided
Binding Binding
on Top setting for duplex.
Left/Right Top Original
Book Orientation
Preview >>2-sided

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

3-13

Basic Operation

Copies 6 If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],
[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or
Duplex
Original
[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
1-sided
>>1-sided originals of Original.
1-sided
>>2-sided Binding Binding

2-sided
>>1-sided
Left/Right Top
7 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
2-sided
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
Original : A4
>>2-sided

Top Edge
on Left]. Then press [OK].
Book
Zoom : 100% >>1-sided on Top
Paper : A4

Preview
Book
>>2-sided
Original
Orientation 8 Press [OK].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

9 Press the Start key.

Once an original placed on the platen is scanned,
replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start
key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to
start copying.

Collate/Offset
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.

You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.

Collate
3
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
2 copies as required according to page number.
3 1
3
2 2
1
1 3
2
1

Original Copy

Offset

Without Document Finisher
If the optional document finisher is not installed, when
3
2 you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after
1
rotating each set (or page) by 90º.
3

2
3
2

1
NOTE: To use sorting, the same size of paper as the
1

2
3 selected paper tray must be loaded in a different
1 orientation in a different paper tray. The paper sizes
supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.

Original Copy (each set)

3-14

Basic Operation

With Document Finisher
When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated
3
2
3
after each set of copies (or after each page).
2 3 1
2
1 3 1
2
1
NOTE: The optional document finisher is required.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A3, B4, A4,
B5, Letter, Legal, Ledger, Oficio II, 8k, 16k,
216×340mm, Folio. 3
Original Copy (each set)

The procedure for using collate/offset copying is
explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/
Offset].

Copies 4 To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate.

Collate/Offset To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.
Collate
Press [OK].
Off On

Offset
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% Off Each Set
Paper : A4

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

Copies If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each
Page] of Offset.
Collate/Offset

Collate 5 Press [OK].
Off On

Offset
Original : A4
Zoom : 100% Off Each Page
Paper : A4

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-15

Basic Operation

Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned
while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure
differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-42).

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]

The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.

Copies 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
Copy Image Shortcut 1

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : A4 Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off
>>1-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6
/Punch

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program
Finishing Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

2 Press the Start key.

The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]

The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.

Copies 1 Press [Reserve Next].

Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: ----- The default screen for copying appears.
Scanner Setting Printer Setting
Scanned Pages Copies

A4 A4 Plain

100% 2-sided

2-sided Collate

Top Edge on Top

Tray A

Cancel Reserve Next

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.

3 Press the Start key.

The machine starts scanning the originals.
When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.

3-16

Basic Operation

Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically
canceled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay
as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 9-76. 3
Copies 1 Press the Interrupt key.

Copy Image Shortcut 1 The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : A4 Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off
>>1-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6
/Punch

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program
Finishing Setup
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt
copy, and configure the copy settings.

3 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.

4 When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt
key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

3-17

Basic Operation

Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.

NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling)
requires the folding unit.
For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to 1,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on
page Appendix-26 or 4,000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-27.

The following stapling options and orientations are available.

Original Orientation: Original Orientation:
Original Orientation: Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top Left Top Edge (Left top
Top Edge (Back Edge) Top Edge (Back Edge)
corner) corner)

Cassette Paper Load
Direction

Cassette Paper Load
Direction

NOTE: B5-R and 16K-R "one staple" is not diagonal.

3-18

Basic Operation

Follow the steps as below for stapling.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

NOTE: When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to
Mixed Size Originals on page 4-6. 3
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/
Punch].

Copies 4 Select the staple position.

Staple/Punch

Staple Top
Left
2 staples
Top NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch].
Off Top
Right
2 staples
Right
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover
2 staples Bind page at the bottom. For more information on saddle
Left and Fold
stitching, refer to Booklet on page 4-20.
Punch 2 holes 3 holes
Left Left
Original : A4
Off 2 holes 3 holes Top Edge
Zoom : 100% on Top
5
Top Top
Paper : A4
2 holes 3 holes
Original
Orientation
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Preview Right Right
the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge
Add Shortcut Cancel OK
on Left]. Then press [OK].
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

6 Press [OK].

7 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

Mixed Size Stapling

Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width or same length as shown in the combinations
below, the output can be stapled. The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30.

• A3 and A4
• B4 and B5
A4 A3
B5 B4
• Ledger and Letter
Letter Ledger
• Ledger and Letter-R
• 8K and 16K
A4 A3
B5 B4
Letter Ledger

Letter-R Legal

Letter-R Legal

3-19

Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole punching. For details on paper sizes that can be punched. refer to Hole Punch Unit (Option) on page Appendix-27. Basic Operation Punch Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding. The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows. 3-20 . NOTE: Requires the optional document finisher and punching unit.

press [Finish Scan]. Place the next original and press the Start key. Copying begins. If the original is placed on the platen. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge Off Top Right 2 staples Right on Left]. Copying begins. 4 Select the type of hole punching. Then press [OK]. 2 staples Bind 6 Left and Fold Press [OK]. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Copies Staple/Punch 5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of Top 2 staples Staple Left Top the originals. Basic Operation Follow the steps as below for punching. 3-21 ./Paper/Finishing]and then press [Staple/Punch]. If all original pages have been scanned. Punch 2 holes 3 holes Left Left Original : A4 Off 2 holes 3 holes Top Edge Zoom : 100% on Top Top Top Paper : A4 Original 2 holes 3 holes Orientation Preview Right Right Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key. 3 Press [Org.

..... A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required.page 3-24 • Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. The following five options are available. the host name of the SMTP server. In order to do this..page 7-7 • Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. At the same time as you send a scanned image.page 3-24 • Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine. To set up the PC Folder. contact your administrator. the recipient.. • Create/Register a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination) • Select detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time) Follow the steps below for basic sending. • When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected. To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps: • Program the settings. you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box. • Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys. The fax function can be used when the optional fax kit has been installed. • Use Command Center RX (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address. • Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. For details about this function.. it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-41.Refer to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination.page 3-23 • Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. including the E-mail setting on the machine. Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. and Settings for E-mail. 3-22 . refer to the FAX Operation Guide... it is necessary to share the destination folder.

6 Press [OK]. Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK]. NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed.120 E-mail and edit it. 1 Press the Send key. the destination from the list.com TUVW 192. Press [E-mail Address]. Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. Basic Operation Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry) Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment. 2 Place the originals on the platen. The destinations are registered in the destination list. Destination 3 Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail Enter Destination. NOTE: Access the Command Center RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. Address]. 1/1 Addr Entry Group1 Group1 Folder Path Entry Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. the destinations are registered in the Address Book. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-39./Sending Color/ Advanced Program Data Format Image Quality Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3-23 . 3 Displays the screen for sending. For details. 5 Press [Next Dest. Destination 7 Check the destination list. Add a new e-mail destination. NOTE: Depending on the settings. the address book screen may appear. see Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24. then enter the address using the keyboard screen. Up to 100 e-mail addresses can be specified. press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending.188. Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Destination Detail Address Book Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check ABCD abcd@efg. In this event. E-mail Address Entry E-mail Address NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys. AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX Addr Entry 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100 WSD Scan FFF GGG HHH III JJJ Destination Quick Setup Org.] and repeat step 3 to specify the destination.168.

press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending. 2 Place the originals on the platen. For details. When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 9-43). • Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Command Center RX is On. NOTE: • Refer to Creating a Shared Folder on page 3-31 for details on how to share a folder. In this event. refer to the Command Center RX Operation Guide. 3-24 . Displays the screen for sending. NOTE: Destinations can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Sending begins. 8 Press the Start key. For details. 1 Press the Send key. refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-28. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. the confirmation screen appears. 3 Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP]. NOTE: Depending on the settings. Send to Folder (Folder Path Entry) Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC. For details. Enter the same destination again and press [OK]. Basic Operation NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination (page 9-44). the address book screen may appear. the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key. refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-39.

The address of the selected shared folder is set. and go to step 6. Select the folder that you want to specify and press [Next]./Symbol Space Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3-25 . you can enter 3 Password the Domain/Workgroup. password. all PCs on the network are searched. login user name and login Enter Destination. and press [Next]. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears. If the connection fails. 5 Enter the destination data and press [OK]. Add to Addr Book Next Dest. SMB Host Name FTP Path To search for a folder on a PC on the network. If you pressed [Windows Network]. Login press [Search SMB Host] or [Windows Network]. path. NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. Select the folder from the Search Results list. Limit: 128 characters Input: 0 characters Backspace ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ˜ Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | A S D F G H J K L : " Z X C V B N M < > ? Lower-case Upper-case Lower-case No. Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 If you pressed [Windows Network]. After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC. Basic Operation Destination 4 Enter host name. Use the keyboard to enter. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. Press the key of each item to first Folder Path Entry display the entry screen. you can search all PCs on the network for a destination. and Host Name to search Search Windows Connection SMB Host Network Test PCs on the network for the destination. check the entries you made. the shared folders appear. User Name Login If you pressed [Search SMB Host].

Test] to check the connection. FTPhostname:140). enclose the address in brackets [ ]. review the entry. User\ScanData. User Name appears. enter using the format “host name: port number” (e. appears when connection to the Login destination is correctly established. [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140) For send to folder (FTP) Item Data to be entered Max. For send to folder (SMB) Item Data to be entered Max. Login Password Search SMB Host Windows Network Connection Test To specify another destination. To enter the IPv6 address. Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3-26 . Up to 128 characters For example. Folder Path Entry SMB Host Name FTP Path NOTE: Connected. SMBhostname:140). [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140) Destination 6 Upon completion of all entries... (e. (e. Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64 characters For example. characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. characters Host Name* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder. User\ScanData. abcdnet\james.. Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password.g. Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Up to 64 characters Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows. Up to 128 characters For example. press [Connection Enter Destination. go to step 7.. To enter the IPv6 address.smith Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters * To specify a port number different from the default (139). Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64 characters * To specify a port number different from the default (21). enter using the format “host name: port number” (e. enclose the address in brackets [ ]. go to step 8. NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory. If Cannot connect.g.g. Basic Operation Data to be entered are as follows. To specify only one destination.g.

Destination Detail Address Book Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check ABCD abcd@efg. Enter the same host name and path again.120 E-mail and edit it./Sending Color/ Advanced Program NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Status Data Format Image Quality Setup 10/10/2010 10:10 Destination (page 9-44). 3-27 . 3 8 Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination list. Destination 9 Check the destination list. the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start key. Addr Entry 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100 WSD Scan FFF GGG HHH III JJJ Destination Quick Setup Org. When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 9-43). You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders.188.com TUVW 192. Sending begins. the confirmation screen appears. Basic Operation 7 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 4 to 6 to specify the destination. refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-28. referring to steps 4 1/1 Group1 Group1 Addr Entry to 6.168. Edit it. 10 Press the Start key. Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove Entry AAA 0001 BBB 0002 CCC 0003 DDD 0004 EEE 0005 No. Folder Path Entry On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. For details. i-FAX the destination from the list. if necessary. the entry is registered in the Address Book. and press [OK]. NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed.

A OFFICE 1234567890 To delete the destination. You cannot press [Check] unless you have confirmed every destination. 3-28 . select the destination you want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on Destination Detail the selected destination. Delete Check To add the destination. Destination 1 Press [ ] or [ ] to confirm every destination. Basic Operation Confirmation Screen of Destinations When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 9-43). 3 Press the Start key to start sending. Cancel Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2 Press [Check]. NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by displaying them on the touch panel. The destination is deleted. press [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen. Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations. Press [Yes] in the Detail confirmation screen. the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the Start key.

NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. 3-29 . In Windows XP. The System Properties dialog box appears. Basic Operation Preparation for sending a document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer. In Windows XP. click the [ X ] (Close) button to close the System Properties screen. 3 Checking what to enter for [Host Name] Check the name of the destination computer. Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears and check the computer name. Example: pc4050) 2 After checking the computer name. click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen. (Example: PC4050) If there is a domain The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. Check the computer name in the window that appears. select Computer and then System Properties. If there is a workgroup All characters appearing in "Full computer name" should be entered in Host Name. The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows. 1 From the Start menu. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. right-click My Computer and select Properties. after checking the computer name.

smith" and domain name "ABCDNET" 3-30 . 1 From the Start menu. Screen example: user name "james. Basic Operation Checking what to enter for [Login User Name] Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows. 2 At the Command Prompt. select All Programs (or Programs). Accessories and then Command Prompt. The Command Prompt window appears. enter "net config workstation" and then click Enter.

click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools. (or Sharing). Click the Advanced Sharing button. Basic Operation Creating a Shared Folder Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer. and then Folder Options. 2 Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing. The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears.. NOTE: For example. 1 Create a folder on the local disk (C).. 3-31 . click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended) in Advanced settings. select Control Panel. configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group. Appearance and Personalization. 2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced settings. 3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen. 1 From the Start menu. NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties. create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the local disk (C). In Windows XP. 3 In Windows XP. right-click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security. In Windows XP.

In Windows XP. 4 Click the Add button. select Share this folder and click the Permissions button. your domain is selected by default as the area to be searched. The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box appears. Click the location button and select the location. If you are in a domain. select a location. Basic Operation 3 Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button. 3-32 . To select the area to be searched. 5 Enter the user name in the text box and click the OK button.

and click the OK button. 3-33 . 7 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen. In Windows XP. it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark. go to step 8. 8 Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button. make sure that checkmarks appear in allow Modify and allow Read & execute. In Windows XP. To strengthen security. select the Change and Read permissions. 3 NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. 9 Select the entered user. Basic Operation 6 Select the entered user. click the Security tab and then click the Add button. and click the close button.

In Windows XP. In the example windowabove. In Windows XP. (Example: scannerdata) NOTE: You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent. click Search in the Start menu. double-click the computer ("pc4050") that appears in the search results. Check the address bar. The Search Results screen opens. In the "Computer name:" text box. "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for the Path. select All files and folders. 3-34 . The third and following text strings (f ) should be entered for the path. The text string to the right of the third backslash (\) should be entered in Path. enter the name of the computer that you checked (pc4050) and then click Search. 2 Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the search results. and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent. Basic Operation Checking the [Path] Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document. In Search Companion. double-click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar. 1 Enter "\\pc4050" in "Program and File Search" in the Start menu. "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path. click Computers or people and then A computer on the network. In Windows XP. 3 Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the search results. In this case.

Basic Operation Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7) Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission. and Allow a program through Windows Firewall. select Control Panel. NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. 2 Click Change settings. System and Security. NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears. 3-35 . Checking file and printer sharing 3 1 From the Start menu. and click OK. select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox. click the Continue button.

3 Click Inbound Rules. and Check firewall status. 2 Click Advanced settings. 3-36 . select Control Panel. 5 Select Port and click Next. System and Security. 4 Click New Rule. Basic Operation Adding a port 1 From the Start menu.

and click Next. 3 7 Select Allow the connection and click Next. enter "139". select Specific local ports. 3-37 . 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click Next. Basic Operation 6 Select TCP.

NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista. 4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box. Select TCP for "Protocol". 3 Specify Add a Port settings. System and Security (or Security Center).. If the User Account Control dialog box appears. 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port. This will be the name of the new port. Enter "139" in "Port Number". Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). and then Check Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall). select Control Panel. 1 From the Start menu. click the Continue button.. follow the procedure below to set the port. 3-38 . button. Basic Operation 9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.

To change the default setting for Sort. select the destination and press [Delete]. refer to Sort on page 9-83. To use 0002 TUVW tuvw@xyz.com Search(Name) indicated by a checkmark in the check box./Sending Color/ Advanced Program Data Format Image Quality Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Address Book 2 Press the checkbox to select the desired Addr Book Address Book Sort Name destination from the list. refer to Command Center RX Operation Guide. you can specify the fax destination. Basic Operation Specifying Destination When specifying destination. NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key. refer to Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) on page 9-77. For details on the external address book. 0004 Group2 Address Book 0005 Group3 Detail You can change the order in which the destinations ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9 are listed by selecting [Name] or [No. refer to Default Screen on page 9-45. AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX Addr Entry 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100 WSD Scan FFF GGG HHH III JJJ Destination Quick Setup Org. Entry 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.168. select [Ext 0003 Group1 1/2 Register/Edit Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down menu. press the check box and remove the checkmark. When the optional fax kit has been installed. Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 NOTE: To cancel the selection. The selected destinations are 0001 ABCD abcd@efg. NOTE: To delete a destination in the list.) an address book on the LDAP server. For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book.188. Destination Detail Address ABCD abcd@efg. press [Address Book]. No. 3-39 . Enter the other party’s number using the numeric keypad. You may choose multiple Dest. Destination 1 In the basic screen for sending.120 1/1 Addr Entry Group1 Group1 Folder Path Entry On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. 3 Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. 3 Press [OK] to register the selected destination in the destination list. Type Name Detail destinations.] from the Sort E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group pull-down menu.com Search(No. For details. choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.com Book E-mail TUVW 192.

FAX. number 3 Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name. [Folder]. i-FAX or Group). No. Search by name Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name. Basic Operation Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.) 1/2 Register/Edit 0004 Group2 Address Book Detail 0005 Group3 (3) ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9 (4) E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Keys Search type Subjects searched used 1 Search by name Search by registered name.com (2) 0003 Group1 Search(No. For more information. by initial letter 4 Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination by destination (E-mail.i-FAX: Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed). The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below. The destinations registered by that type are displayed. Folder (SMB/FTP). Type Name Detail (1) 0001 ABCD abcd@efg. Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available. (FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed. Advanced search by initial letter Press the key for the required initial letter. Address Book Addr Book Address Book Sort Name Dest. You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed. Search by address number Press [Search(No. Advanced search by destination Press any of [E-mail]. 2 Search by address Search by registered address number.com Search(Name) 0002 TUVW tuvw@xyz.)] and enter the address number you wish to search. refer to Narrow Down on page 9- 83. [i-FAX] or [Group]. [FAX]. 3-40 .

press the Quick No. press [ ] or AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX Addr Entry [ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch FFF 0006 GGG 0007 HHH 0008 III 0009 JJJ 0010 1/100 WSD Scan Keys. etc.168.188. Destination Detail Address Book In the basic screen for sending. depending on the settings. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100 Folders (SMP.120 E-mail Keys where the destination is registered. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. NOTE: If the destinations include a fax. Destination Detail Address ABCD abcd@efg.) in a single operation. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Entry screen. Destination Quick Setup Org. folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional). Basic Operation One Touch Key Destination Select the destination using the One Touch Keys. 1/1 Group1 Group1 Addr Entry Search key or [No.168. Press the Start key to start transmission to all destinations at one time. Speed Dial Destination Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial)./Sending Color/ Advanced Program press [OK].com TUVW 192.120 E-mail In the basic screen for sending. press the One Touch ABCD abcd@efg. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. the images sent to all destinations will be black and white. 3-41 . Entry destination is hidden on the touch panel. you can send and print at the same time. 1/1 Addr Entry Group1 Group1 Folder Path Entry NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired 3 On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) on page 9-81 for more information on adding One Touch keys. Destination Quick Setup Org.188. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses.] and use the numeric keys to enter Folder Path Entry the One Touch key number in the numeric entry On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX Addr Entry FFF 0006 GGG 0007 HHH 0008 III 0009 JJJ 0010 1/100 WSD Scan NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit. Data Format Image Quality Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses. This is referred to as Multi Sending./Sending Color/ Advanced Program This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have Status Data Format Image Quality Setup 10/10/2010 10:10 already been registered. folders. FTP) : Total of 10 SMB and FTP FAX : Up to 500 i-FAX : Up to 100 Also.com Book TUVW 192. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. No.

. Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. and manipulate data in various ways as described below: • Creating a box... the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest document data. These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.page 7-13 Job Box Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print. Basic Operation Using the Document Box What is Document Box? Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users. Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box.page 7-15 Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box. specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver...... In this event. The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the main power switch is turned off.page 7-10 • Deleting Documents in a Custom Box.. but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required. NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum.. Custom Box. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly. The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel. Proof and Hold.. you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel..page 7-4 • Printing a Document in a Custom Box. Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.page 7-14 In Private Printing. In Hold Job.page 7-5 • Sending a Document from a Custom Box... up to 32 documents can be stored. you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. refer to Deletion of Job Retention on page 7-19.page 7-2 • Storing Documents in a Custom Box. 3-42 .. Stored Job. Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later. all stored jobs will be deleted..page 7-7 • Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box. You can create or delete a Custom Box. When power is turned off. Private Print/Stored Job Box.page 7-2 Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. When additional copies are required. you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. access codes are not mandatory. For details. ensuring confidentiality of the print job.. When sending the job from the application software. Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing. NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. Quick Copy.. By default.

XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB). 3-43 . JPEG. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box..page 7-18 Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies later.. up to 32 documents can be stored. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF.. Form for Form Overlay Box. This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying.page 7-20 Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. By default. TIFF. Fax Box Fax Box stores the fax data received. the original data will be 3 deleted. refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit. This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory. To continue to print the remaining copies. When power is turned off. use the operation panel. Removable Memory Box A USB memory inserted into the USB Port (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. For details. Basic Operation The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies.. You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC. You can change the number of copies to print. NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Repeat Copy Box.

[Job Box] or [Removable Memory] to select the type of document box you No. NOTE: For more information on registering boxes. using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes. For details on User Logon privileges.) In this example. enter the correct password. access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password. 1 Press the Document Box key. Store File Detail Open Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Status Memory 10/10/2010 10:10 NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. For more information Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program on using the box list. For more information on using the document list. Name Owner Used 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. Search(Name) The document list screen appears.) 1/1 You can use this screen for tasks such as printing Add/Edit Box and sending documents. 1/1 Add/Edit Box The box list screen appears. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password. it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. refer to Custom Box List on Status Memory 10/10/2010 10:10 page 3-45. 2 Press [Custom Box]. 3 Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press [Open]. 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. refer to User Privileges on page 3-49. You can use this screen for tasks such as Store File Detail Open registering and editing boxes. Name Owner Used want to work with. Basic Operation Basic Operation for Document Box This section explains basic operations for document boxes. You cannot access boxes if you forget your password. Search(Name) Search(No. refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on page 7-2. The default document box screen appears. Search(No. In this event. 3-44 . NOTE: In the following explanation. refer to Document List on page 3-46. The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below. press [Custom Box]. No.

3 No. alphabetical order. Search(Name) A box can be searched for Search(No. A box can be searched for by Box Name. Saves the document Store File Detail Open Opens the selected box.) by Box No. Name Owner Used 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box Program Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Displays the details for the selected box. as shown below. in the selected box. Basic Operation Custom Box List The box list shows the registered custom boxes. Listing the boxes by number in Listing the boxes by name in Listing the boxes by owner in ascending/descending order. alphabetical order. You can manipulate the list in a range of ways. 3-45 . modifies or deletes box information. 1/1 Add/Edit Box Registers new boxes and checks. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.

.. sends. The list can be used as shown below. 3-46 . However. moves. document at a time. Detail Preview Selecting documents by Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File Saves the document in the checking checkboxes. Basic Operation Document List The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. 2008101010575.. Documents can be listed either by name or as thumbnails. to display its details with 2008101010575. Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Thumbnail Switches between list display Selecting more than one Box: and thumbnail display. 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 Detail Preview Previews the selected Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File document. Close open box. ascending/descending order.. 1/1 selected documents. note that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents. Selecting more than one Box: document at a time. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB checking checkboxes. ascending/descending order. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) Highlighting a document to Selecting documents by display its details with [Detail]. joins. SALES Search(Name) Highlighting a document Prints.. copies or deletes the [Detail]. List Listing the documents by name Listing the documents by time of update in Listing the documents by size in in alphabetical order.. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. 2008101010575.

Search(Name) Search(No. Box No. 1/1 Add enter the correct password. Detail/Edit Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Box: 123456 3 Check the box details. Basic Operation Viewing/Editing Box Details You can check and modify box information.: Change 0001 To edit details. Document Box/Removable Memory . Use the procedure below. press [Save] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. 5 Press [Close]. 3-47 .Add/Edit Box 2 Highlight the box whose details you wish to check 3 or edit and press [Detail/Edit]. Name Owner Used 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. The display returns to the default Document Box screen. press [Change] of the detail you Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: Change wish to edit. press [No]. If you did not change the details. Edit the detail as desired and press SALES 200 MB [OK]. 1 Press [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen. Box Password: Change ******** Auto File Deletion: Change Overwrite Setting: Change 30 day(s) Permit Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change 30 GB Off Cancel Save Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 If you have changed the details. No.) NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password.

Zoom in. Color : Full Color 1/6 In multiple-page documents. 3-48 . Preview: 2007040410574501 you can change pages by Size : A4 No. In multiple-page documents. 3 When you have finished previewing documents or checking document details. 1 Select (highlight) a document to preview and then press [Preview] or [Detail]. entering the desired page Resol. Use the procedure below. you can use these keys to move the displayed area. : 300x300dpi number. Basic Operation Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for checking. Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Zoom out. press [Close]. 2 Preview the document or check the document details. When you have zoomed in. you can use these buttons to change pages. The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.

Basic Operation User Privileges When user login administration is enabled. 3-49 . User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes. Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows: Accessibility Access level Administrator User 3 Creating a box Yes No Changing box owner Yes No Operation Deleting a box Others Yes No Owner Yes Yes Changing box Others Yes No number Owner Yes No Renaming a box Others Yes No Owner Yes Yes Changing the Others Yes No password to a box Owner Yes Yes Adjusting the box Others Yes No Box information capacity Owner Yes No Changing the owner Others Yes No Owner Yes No Changing the Others Yes No permission Owner Yes Yes Changing the Others Yes No period of using a box Owner Yes Yes Restricting the Accessibility to a Box The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows: Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes. accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege.

The user is not required to enter a password to gain access to his/her own boxes. the auto file deletion and the overwrite SALES 200 MB setting. Off 30 MB Then press [OK]. Basic Operation Password Entry Requirement When user login administration is enabled. the owner of Box No.: Change Owner: Change administration is enabled. Only Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: Change administrators and machine administrators can create SALES 200 MB new Custom Boxes. User: The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password. Then press [OK]. requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as follows: Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access to any box. Box Password: Change Permission: Change ******** Private Overwrite Setting: Auto File Deletion: Change Change 30 day(s) Permit Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change 30 MB Off Cancel Save Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3-50 . the Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: permission. Box Password: Change Permission: Change ********** Private Auto File Deletion: Change Overwrite Setting: Change Changing the owner: Press [Change] of Owner and 30 day(s) Permit select the new owner for the Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change box from the displayed list. the box password. NOTE: For information on specifying other settings. Cancel Save Changing the permission:Press [Change] of Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Permission and select either [Private] or [Shared].: Owner: a box with user privileges set can change the following 0001 DCBA9876 box information: the box name. Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled Box: When user login administration is enabled. Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled Box: If you create a new Custom Box when user login Box No. the screen appears and you 0001 DCBA9876 can change the owner and permission settings. refer to Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) on page 7-2.

2-sided Collate Top Edge on Top 1 Press the Stop key or [Cancel]. Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed. do the following: 1 Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer. Job Cancel appears. 2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select Cancel from the Document menu. NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending. select [Cancel]. 3-51 . and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. Copies NOTE: Job No. Cancelling job screen appears. 2 To cancel printing. Printing jobs 1 Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send 3 screen displayed. 2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press [Cancel].: 000021 Scanner Setting Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: ----- Printer Setting If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 9-42) is set to Scanned Pages Copies [Off] A4 A4 Plain The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during 100% 2-sided printing. The current print job is temporarily interrupted. Sending jobs 1 Press the Stop key with the copy screen or send screen displayed. Tray A Cancel Reserve Next The current print job is canceled. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Canceling printing from a computer To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing.

refer to the Fax System (V) Operation Guide. Functions Available for Function Default Registration Registration Copying 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection 2: Zoom • Zoom 3: Density • Density 4: Duplex • Duplex 5: Combine • Combine 6: Staple/Punch • Staple/Punch • Original Orientation • Collate/Offset • Original Image • Original Size • Continuous Scan • Background Density Adj. For details on Quick Setup Screen for FAX. Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency. Basic Operation Quick Setup Screen In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power-on). Sending 1: Color Selection • Zoom 2: Scan Resolution • Scan Resolution 3: Density • FAX TX Resolution 4: 2-sided/Book Original • Density 5: Continuous Scan • 2-sided/Book Original 6: File Format • File Format • Original Size • Sending Size • Original Orientation • Original Image • Color Selection • Continuous Scan • Background Density Adj. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows. important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine. 3-52 .

Shortcut 2 Shortcut 3 Auto 100% Normal 0 Shortcut 4 Paper Zoom Density Original : A4 Selection Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5 Paper : A4 1-sided Off Off >>1-sided Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 /Punch Quick Setup Org. [Next] of Quick Setup Registration. Basic Operation Functions Available for Function Default Registration Registration Document Document 1: Color Selection • Color Selection Box Storage 2: Resolution • Resolution 3: Density • Density 4: 2-sided/Book Original • 2-sided/Book Original 5: Original Orientation • Original Orientation 3 6: Original Image • Original Image • Original Size • Zoom • Continuous Scan • Storing Size • Background Density Adj. and then [Change] of Original Image./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 1 Press the System Menu key. Sending 1: File Format • File Format From Box 2: Delete after Transmitted • Delete after Transmitted 3: FAX TX Resolution • FAX TX Resolution 4: Sending Size • Sending Size Printing 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection From Box 2: Delete after Printed • Delete after Printed 3: Collate/Offset • Collate/Offset 4: Duplex • Duplex 5: Combine • Staple/Punch 6: Staple/Punch • Combine Changing Registration Copies The following procedure is one example for replacing the registration of Density with Original Image in the Copy Image Shortcut 1 Quick Setup Screen for copying. 3-53 . 2 Press [Copy].

location. A confirmation screen appears. The Original Image Quality function will be Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 newly registered. Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3-54 . Press Off [Yes].Original Image 3 Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement Add Original Image to the Quick Setup screen. 4 Press [OK]. Basic Operation Copy .

1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed. 2 Press [Add] and press a number (01 to 50) for the program number. you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions. and press [Next]. Send screen or Document Box screen. 3 Check that [Copy] is selected. NOTE: If you select a program number already registered. the currently registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions. 3-55 . The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your environment. 4 Enter the new program name and press [Save] to register the program. go to step 4. Basic Operation Program By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program. The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function. you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling. Registering Programs Use the procedure below to register a program. Number Program name Default Registration 01 ID Card Copy Copying function 3 Color: Black & White Combine: [2 in 1] Continuous Scan: [On] Original Size: Statement (A5-R) Paper Selection: Cassette 1 Zoom: Auto Zoom 02 Eco Copy Copying function Color: Black & White EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5]) NOTE: Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program. The programs below have been preregistered. If user login administration is enabled. If entering Program screen from the Copy screen.

2 Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete. Quick No. Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program. press [Delete this Program]. 05 Send 2 06 FAX 1 07 FAX 2 08 Box 1 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Recall Add Edit Status 10/10/2010 10:10 If [Program] is pressed in the copy function screen NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled. Check the Document Box. Search key or [No. Then change the program number and program name and press [Save]. To delete the program. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program. or delete program. Press the 01 ID Card Copy 02 Eco Copy 03 Copy 1 04 Send 1 No. use the procedure for registering a program and press [Change]. 1 Press the Program key. 3 To edit a program. program might have been deleted. 05 Send 2 06 FAX 1 07 FAX 2 08 Box 1 [Program] can be pressed in each function to call up 09 10 11 12 the program registered for the function. Copying is performed according to the registered Quick Setup Org. 2 Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to recall. If the Program key is pressed 1 Press the Program key. the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the 01 ID Card Copy 02 Eco Copy 03 Copy 1 04 Send 1 No. 3-56 ./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced Program program. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 Place the originals and press the Start key. Basic Operation Recalling Programs Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.] to enter the program number directly for recalling. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the program. Finishing Setup Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Editing and Deleting Programs You can change program number and program name.

press [Delete this Shortcut]. press [Add Shortcut]. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen. Use the procedure below to register a shortcut. Memo Page Layout Off Layout A Place original. press [Add Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen. and functions set for document box. NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already registered. To delete the shortcut. press [Change] to change the shortcut button number and name and press [OK] and then [Save]. Send. 3 Enter the shortcut name and press [Save] to add the shortcut. sending functions. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut. Editing and Deleting Shortcuts Follow the steps shown below to change a shortcut number/name or delete a shortcut. 1 In the setup screen of each function. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions. and Document Box Settings) Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. 3-57 . Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut. Basic Operation Registering Shortcuts (Copy. 3 To edit a shortcut. the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one. Copies 1 After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function. 2 Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete. Top Top L to R R to L None Layout B Border Line Original Original : : --- A4 Top Edge Zoom Zoom : : 100% 100% on Top Top Top Paper Paper : : --- A4 L to B R to B Original Preview Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register. Adding Shortcuts 3 Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary.

The Internet browser starts up. refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-59. NOTE: To use the internet browser. For details. NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed. Basic Operation Using the Internet Browser This section explains how to use the Internet browser. 4 To exit the browser. refer to Internet (page 9-84). internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page 9-84. The application list screen appears. For information on how to use the browser screen. 3-58 . Weekly Timer Internet Browser Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages. The application list screen reappears. 1 Press the Application key. press [X] (Close) and then press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen. Launching and Exiting the Browser Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser. 2 Press [Internet Browser].

page by entering the URL for Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search that page. You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the [Search]. 3-59 . the loader changes to an animated display. KYOCERA MITA Scroll bars These allow you to scroll the displayed page up. [ ]. Search box Pressing the text box displays a keyboard. Close 3 Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen. left and right by pressing [ ]. Menu Displays the browser setup menu. with the entered keyword. down. When the browser is loading a web page. Enter URL Search Menu Loader/Progress bar Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Shows the status of page loading. Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page) Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval Use this to display a desired web in page] or an Internet search site. Title bar Displays the page title. [SearchUp] or [SearchDown]. Back/Forward Displays the previous page or the next page. You can use this menu to specify the browser's display magnification. Home page Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in Displays your specified home page. Security lock icon Displayed when you are viewing a protected page. set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate. Reload Updates the page. You can You can set your home page in the continue your search by pressing Browser Preferences on page 9-84. NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application list screen without displaying the browser exit. [ ] or [ ] or by moving one of the slide bars with your finger. Basic Operation Using the Browser Screen The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below. the currently displayed page.

NOTE: When user management is enabled. Be sure to set the time before using Weekly Timer. IMPORTANT: On/off using Weekly Timer puts the machine in the same state (sleep) as when the power key is pressed on the operation panel. press [Retry Times]. To have retries made continuously until the machine power turns off. You will return to the application list screen. The application list screen appears. When using Weekly Timer. Weekly Timer starts up. For details. 5 Press the [Enable] checkboxes for power ON/OFF so that checkmarks appear. 8 To close. Weekly Timer allows you to store machine on/off times for each day of the week and set the machine to automatically turn on and off at those times. press the [Continue to Retry] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. 2 Press [Weekly Timer]. [# Keys] can be pressed to enter the time with the numeric keys on the operation panel. 6 If you need to change the number of retries made when the power is not successfully turned off. press [+] or [-] to enter the times. and press [OK]. 4 Select the day you want to set and press [Edit]. Basic Operation Using Weekly Timer "Weekly Timer" is installed on the machine as a standard application. 3 Press the [Enable the Application] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. press [End]. you must log in with administrator authority to use this feature. 7 Set the Retry Times and the Retry Interval. do not turn off the main power switch. 3-60 . and press [OK]. see Setting Date and Time on page 2-12 Setting Weekly Timer 1 Press the Application key.

you can check how to operate it using the touch panel./Paper/Finishing]. The Help screen shows explanations of functions and how to use them. pressing [ ] or [ ] when Displays information the help text cannot be about functions and displayed in its entirety on a machine operation.) screen. Displays the Help list. (In the 1/2 case of this screen. Help Screen Display Help titles Selecting Paper Source Scrolls up and down by Select paper source by choosing a Cassette or MP Tray. 3-61 . 1. press the Help key on the operation panel. Press [Paper Selection]. Basic Operation Checking Counter Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets printed and scanned. Show the screen of the tab that includes the function explained in Help. Setting Procedure single screen. To show the Help screen. refer to Checking and Printing Counter on Printed Pages page 10-33. Copy Printer FAX Total Black&White: 300 600 100 1000 Scanned Pages Copy FAX Others Total Originals: 600 200 1000 1800 Print Printed Pages Status Page by Paper Size Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Help Screen If you have difficulty operating the machine. 3 Counter For details. Press [Org. 2. the screen that appears after Try It Display List End Closes the Help screen and step 1 of Setting Procedure Status 10/10/2010 10:10 returns to the original is performed will appear.

Basic Operation 3-62 .

...........................................4-2 • Paper Selection...............4-37 • Auto Image Rotation ................4-31 • EcoPrint ................................4-38 • Mirror Image.......................................................................................4-16 • Border Erase........................................4-11 • Paper Output...........................................................................................................................................................................4-13 • Combine...............................4-36 • Continuous Scan....................................4-42 • Priority Override ............................................................................4-34 • Background Density Adj........4-18 • Booklet ..............4-33 • Sharpness.....................................................4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying........................................................................ • Original Size.......................................................................................4-42 • Repeat Copy ..............................................4-30 • Bates Stamp........................................4-3 • Mixed Size Originals .......................4-22 • Form Overlay ........................................................................................................................4-14 • Margin/Centering .........................................................................................4-28 • Text Stamp .....................................................................................................................................................................4-35 • Prevent Bleed-thru ..........4-40 • File Name Entry .....................................4-44 4-1 .......................................................................................................................................................................4-6 • Original Orientation ..................................4-24 • Memo Page....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-23 • Page #......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-43 • DP Read Action ....................................................................................................................4-39 • Job Finish Notice ...........................................4-20 • Cover ...........................................................................................4-9 • Fold ...............................................................................................................................................................................4-38 • Negative Image...............................................4-26 • Image Repeat ..................................

16K. Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) * For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4). [Standard Sizes 2 ].00" (in 0. B6-R. Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ]. B5-R. Statement. Sizes 2 sizes not included in the B6. Oufuku hagaki. A4. 1 Press the Copy key. Folio. refer to Custom Original Size on page 9-4. B5-R. A5-R. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard sizes.01" increments) Metric models Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments). Statement-R. ** The input units can be changed in the System menu. Letter-R. Custom 1 to 4 postcard or the custom sized originals*. Refer to Measurement on page 9-12. Letter-R. A6-R. Folio and 216×340mm Standard Select from the standard Inch models: A3. 16K-R and Standard Sizes 1. Letter. A5. Ledger. 216×340mm Metric models: Ledger. or Statement. B6. B4. Item How to Select Sizes Standard Have the size of original Inch models: Auto.00 to 11. Oficio II and 11×15" select from the standard Metric models: Auto. 2 Place the originals on the platen. A4-R.00 to 17. 8K. The following options are available. 3 Press [Org. B5. Size Entry Enter the size not included in Inch models the standard sizes 1 and 2**. Sizes 1 detected automatically. Legal. A4. Vertical: 2. Use the procedure below to select the original size. 11×15"./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Size]. Statement-R. Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned. A3. [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size. sizes. A5-R. 8K. A5. A4-R. Original Size Standard Auto A3 A4 Sizes 1 A4 A5 A5 Standard Sizes 2 A6 B4 B5 Others B5 B6 B6 Size Entry Original : A4 216x340mm Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-2 . Hagaki. B4.69" (in 0.01" increments). B5. Letter. Horizontal: 2. Legal. Oficio II. A6-R. 16K and 16K-R Others Select from envelope. B6-R.

Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview # Keys Status Add Shortcut Cancel OK 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size. 3 Press [Org. press [+] or [-] to specify the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y). (refer to Conveying Guide on page 11-18) Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette. 6 Press the Start key to start copying.297) Original : 210x297mm Size Entry 210 mm 6 Press the Start key to start copying./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper Selection]. Others Y (50 . use the provided cleaning cloth to clean the conveying guide.432) Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the Standard Sizes 1 297 mm numeric keys. dirt on the conveying guide may soil the edges of the paper infrequently. Copying Functions Copies If [Size Entry] is selected. Standard Sizes 2 # Keys 5 Press [OK]. If you find that the paper is soiled. NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper Settings on page 9-4). Original Size X (50 . Plain A3 A4 MP Tray Original : A4 Plain Plain 5 Press [OK]. the paper matching the size of A4 the original is selected automatically. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-3 . 1 Press the Copy key. The cassette in which the Paper Selection paper is loaded is selected. Copies 4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to the required paper size. Auto Cassette If [Auto] is selected. When printing on paper that is wider than the paper previously used. 2 Place the originals on the platen. A4 Zoom : 100% MP Tray Plain Paper : A4 Preview A4 Plain Paper Set.

Legal. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. B6-R. Letter-R. *** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8. High Quality. Custom 1 to 8*** * For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4). 16K. Recycled. Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) Media Plain (105 g/m2 or less). A6-R. Statement-R. Oficio II. B5-R. Envelope C5. 4-4 . Youkei 4. Folio and 216×340mm Standard Choose from Inch models: A3. 16K-R and sizes not 216×340mm included in the Standard Metric models: Ledger. Letter. Labels. Preprinted***. Metric models: A3. Cardstock. Envelope. A4.86 to 11. Coated. Prepunched***. Oficio II and Executive size. 16K and 16K-R Others Choose from ISO B5. Refer to Measurement on page 9-12. A4-R. Thick (106 g/m2 or more). To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. sizes. Sizes 1. Rough. Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type. A4-R. Oufuku hagaki.01" increments). Legal. B4. Youkei 2 and Custom 1 to 4* Size Enter the Inch models Entry size not Horizontal: 5. included in Vertical: 3. Envelope Monarch. Letter. Color. Envelope C4. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). A5-R. B4. How to Category Item Sizes Select Paper Standard Choose from Inch models: Ledger. custom Envelope DL. A4. Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments). non-standard Envelope #9 (Commercial #9).69" (in 0. Executive. ** The input units can be changed in the System menu. Folio.01" increments) the standard sizes 1 and Metric models 2**. A6-R.83 to 17" (in 0. A5-R. Type Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less). Letterhead***. Hagaki. NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 9-7). B5-R. refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11. refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. Letter-R. 8K. B5. Transparency. 8K. Size Sizes 1 the standard Statement. B6. Envelope #6 sizes and (Commercial #6 3/4). Sizes 2 the standard B6-R. B5. refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9-5. Bond.

Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ]. [Paper Selection] and then [Media Type]. 10 If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray. 4-5 . You can enter Paper Selection . Paper Selection .Paper Settings X (148 . [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.432) the size directly using the numeric keys after Standard Sizes 1 297 mm pressing [# Keys]. 7 Press [OK]. press [+] or [–] to specify X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. Standard 5 Sizes 2 # Keys Press [Media Type]. a paper confirmation screen appears. [Standard Sizes 2 ].297) Size Entry 210 mm Plain Media Type # Keys Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Select paper type. Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type. When [Auto] is used and the same size of paper as the detected original size is not loaded. 9 Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.Paper Settings Standard Sizes 1 A3 A4 A4 4 A5 A6 B4 Standard Sizes 2 B5 B5 B6 Others 216x340mm Size Entry Plain Media Type Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies If you select [Size Entry]. and press [OK]. Others Y (98 . 1 Press the Copy key. 3 Press [Org. a confirmation screen appears. 8 Press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen./Paper/Finishing]. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press [Continue] to start copying.

Supported Combinations of Originals Originals of the Same Width The supported combinations of originals are as follows. Copying Functions Mixed Size Originals Using the optional document processor. Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4) Ledger Letter Letter Ledger (A3) (A4) (A4) (A3) Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R) Legal Letter-R Letter-R Legal (Folio) (A4-R) (A4-R) (Folio) B4 and B5 4-6 . In this operation. up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time. the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R. Copying Functions Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only) Place all originals of different widths. refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10. A4 and B5 4 B4. B5-R. A3. B4. and Folio. B5-R and Folio B5-R A4-R A4-R B5-R 4-7 . A4-R and B5 A4-R B4 A4-R B5 B5 B4 A4-R. For more information. The supported combinations of originals are as follows. make sure to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio].

Option Description Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals. 2 Place originals on the document processor. Mixed Size Originals 5 Original Width Off Select the combination of originals from [Same Mixed Size Same Width Different Width] and [Different Width]. NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not. Copies Width When [Same Size Copies] is selected. Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals. 1 Press the Copy key./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size Originals]. and skewing or original jams may result. IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width. The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options. 4-8 . they may not be scanned correctly. Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper. Copies 4 Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies] as finish size. 3 Press [Org. Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Long Edge Short Edge Preview Left Left 6 Press [OK]. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key to start copying. and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this way. select [Long Same Size Copies Top Page Direction Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original Original : A4 orientation. arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are aligned. Copying Functions Selecting How to Copy Originals Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.

4-9 . • Zoom (XY Zoom) • Duplex • Margin/Centering originals • Border erase • Combine mode • Memo mode 4 • Page numbering • Booklets • Stapling/Punch (optional feature) • 2-sided/Book Original • Text Stamp • Bates Stamp NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 9-16 setting in the System Menu. When placing originals on the platen Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left] When placing originals on the optional document processor Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left] NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation. Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions. the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions. refer to Original Orientation on page 9-16.

Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen. 3 Press [Org. 5 Press [OK]. Copies 4 Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] as the way the original is oriented. 6 Press the Start key to start copying./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Orientation]. Original : A4 Top Edge Top Edge Zoom : 100% on Top on Left Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-10 . 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document's top edge.

The following folding options and orientations are available. 4 Orientaion: Landscape Orientaion: Portrait Bi-Fold R to L / B to T Inside L to R / T to B Tri-Fold R to L / B to T Outside L to R / T to B 4-11 . refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page Appendix-28.000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit. Copying Functions Fold You can fold finished copies. NOTE: Folding requires the optional 4. For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded.

Paper : A4 Preview 6 Press the Start key to start copying. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-12 . refer to Booklet on page 4-20. Fold Off Staple NOTE: To use saddle stitching. 3 Press [Org. For more information on saddle stitching. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Copies 4 Select the fold method. Copying Functions The procedure for using fold copying is explained below. Tri-Fold Original Zoom : A4 : 100% Off Saddle Stitch 5 Press [OK]. 1 Press the Copy key./Paper/Finishing] and then [Fold]. press [Bi-Fold] and Bi-Fold then [Saddle Stitch].

and mailbox. 1 Press the Copy key. Paper Output 5 Press [OK]. Use the procedure below to select the output destination.000 sheet document finisher. Tray C Trays A to C in the optional 4. NOTE: To change the default destination for copies.000 sheet document finisher Right Tray Optional right job separator Job Separator Tray* Optional job separator Tray 1 to 7 Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray) * This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed.) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output destination.000 sheet document finisher. the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used. 3 Press [Org. Copying Functions Paper Output You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies. 2 Place the originals on the platen. The table below shows the available output destinations./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper Output]. 4. Copies 4 Select the output destination for finished copies. 6 Face Up Press the Start key to start copying.000 sheet document finisher Finisher Top Tray Tray A. Tray A Tray B Tray C Right Tray Original : A4 Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Tray 5 Tray 6 Tray 7 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-13 . 4 Destination Description Inner tray* Inner tray of the machine (where copies are stored) Finisher Left Tray Tray of the optional 1. Tray B. 1. When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 . refer to Paper Output on page 9-15 for details. NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator.

NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3. Copying Functions Combine This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. Letter-R. The page boundary of each original can be indicated. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet. 2-in-1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE: When placing the original on the platen. 16K and 16K-R. A4. Ledger. The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Oficio II. 8K. Folio. be sure to copy the originals in page order. Statement-R. A5-R. B5. B5-R. Legal. B4. 216×340mm Letter. A4-R. 4-14 . 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode.

be sure to copy the originals in page order. Copying Functions 4-in-1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available. Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available. None Solid Dotted Borders (Cropmark) 4-15 . This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor 4 NOTE: When placing the original on the platen.

Combine 5 Layout Off Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines 2 in 1 to indicate page boundaries. If the original is placed on the platen.75" (in 0. you can also specify the margin on the back side. 4-16 . Copying begins. Then press [OK]. Original Preview Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK 7 Press [OK]. Refer to Margin Default on page 9-22 for details. Margin/Centering Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side. you can center the original image on the paper. When you copy onto paper different from the original size. Auto When [Auto] is selected. an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation. Input units Margin Width Inch Models -0. Separate Front/Back Margins Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately. press [Finish Scan] to start copying. After scanning all originals. 1 Press the Copy key. and choose the page layout of Layout. either [Top Edge on Top] Top Edge Zoom Paper : 100% : A4 Down then Right Down then Left on Top or [Top Edge on Left].75 to 0.01" increments) Metric Models -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments) Margin on the Back Side When duplex copying. replace the original and press the Start key. Copies 4 Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1]. NOTE: You can set the default margin width. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 8 Press the Start key. Press [OK]. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine]. Copying Functions The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below. The following margin widths are available. Right then Left then Down Down None 4 in 1 Border Line 6 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the Original : A4 orientation of the originals.

4-17 . Top Edge Zoom : 100% on Top Paper : A4 Original Preview # Keys Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies If you selected [Auto]. Top Edge Zoom : 100% on Top Paper : A4 Original Preview Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key to start copying.+18) Top/Bottom. press [Back Page] and select Original : A4 0 mm [Auto] or [Manual]. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. If you pressed [Manual]. Copying Functions Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.+18) Back Page For duplex copying. Auto +6 mm Manual # Keys Top/Bottom (-18 . Margin/Centering Off 5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the Margin orientation of the originals. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 1 Press the Copy key. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering]. enter the margins in the displayed screen Margin/Centering . Auto # Keys Centering Top/Bottom (-18 .+18) and then press [OK]. Then press [OK]. press [OK]. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric 4 Off 0 mm Margin keys for entry. Margin/Centering Left/Right Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and (-18 .Back Page Left/Right (-18 . Copies 4 Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin. Centering Original : A4 6 Press [OK].+18) Original : A4 +6 mm Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview # Keys Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies Press [Centering] to center the original image on the paper.

Original Copy In each option. 4-18 . The following options can be selected. Original Copy Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges. Original Copy Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. Input units Border Erase Range Inch Models 0 to 2"(in 0. Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original. Copying Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies. refer to Border Erase Default on page 9-21 for details. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book. the available ranges are as shown below.01" increments) Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments) NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].50) Off Top 6 Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top. Sheet # Keys Same as Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Border Erase Front Page Book Left 6 mm Back Page Original : A4 Individual Right 6 mm Press [Original Orientation] to select the original Border Erase Zoom Paper : 100% : A4 Top Edge on Top orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Original Preview # Keys Orientation Edge on Left]. Copies 4 Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase Border Erase Border (0 . Then press [OK]. Off 6 mm Border Erase Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.50) borders for a book.50) Individual 6 mm Original : A4 Border Erase Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview # Keys Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase. For details. Border Erase Front Page Book Back Page Gutter (0 . Item Detail Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting Page as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page 4 NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. The table below shows the available settings. this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. 6 Press the Start key to start copying. Bottom. 1 Press the Copy key. 5 Press [OK]. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 For 2-sided originals. refer to Paper Selection on page 9-40. press [Back Page] and then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase]. 4-19 . Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying. Border Erase (0 . Left mm Border Erase or Right. Copying Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2-sided original. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for Sheet Bottom 6 mm Same as entry.

A5-R. A4. A4-R. You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Type of Original Original Size Paper Size One-sided original. Legal. A5-R. NOTE: Using the optional 4. To feed the cover paper from the cassette. A5. Letter. B5-R. B5.000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two with staples in the center). Letter-R and 8K 16K and 16K-R * The optional document processor and the Expansion Memory are required. Two-sided original* Ledger. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray. B5-R. B5-R. Original Copy For binding on the right side The folded copies can be read from right to left. refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11. A4. B4. Original Copy For top binding The folded copies can be read from top to bottom. Ledger. The supported original and paper sizes are as follows. Letter-R. Ledger. All** A3. A booklet. Letter and Letter-R Book original A3. A4-R. Copying Functions Booklet The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. Original Copy 4-20 . ** Except for custom sized originals. such as a magazine. 8K. For binding on the left side The folded copies can be read from left to right. This is limited to the A3. Letter-R. A4-R. is made by folding at the center. B4. A4-R. B4. Legal. B5.

refer to Center-Folding Unit (Option) on page Appendix-28. [2-sided>>Booklet]. To fold finished copies in half. Booklet Original Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet 4 Off Off Binding Left/Right Cover from two-sided originals. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. 8 If the optional 4. be sure to place the originals in page order. 10 Press the Start key. press [Staple/Fold] and then press [Fold Only]. Copying begins. Copying Functions The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below. 7 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. Left Book 5 Original : A4 Zoom : 100% >>Booklet Binding Right Top Edge on Top If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or Paper : A4 Preview Binding Original Orientation [Book>>Booklet]. press [Finish Scan] to start copying. or [Book>>Booklet] you can add the cover. Press [Cover]. 4-21 . After scanning all originals. consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key. choose the binding orientation in Top Finishing. 9 Press [OK]. To use saddle stitching. 2 Place the originals on the platen. select [Cover] and press [OK]. 6 If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet]. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet]. 1 Press the Copy key. If the originals are placed on the platen. the [Staple/Fold] option is displayed. Copies 4 Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from single-sided originals. choose the binding orientation in Finishing. Then press [OK]. For details.000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed. NOTE: When using the platen. 1-sided Binding >>Booklet Top Off Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from 2-sided Finishing >>Booklet Binding Staple /Fold an open book original. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet]. NOTE: The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies by paper weight. press [Staple/Fold] and then press [Saddle Stitch].

* Set paper source for cover in System Menu. Copies 4 Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers]. consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key. Original : A4 Front and Back Off Front Cover Zoom : 100% Covers Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press the Start key. Cover 5 Press [OK]. Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are Covers copied on different paper. refer to Paper Source for Cover on page 9-11. To feed the cover paper from the cassette. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Copying begins. Print the cover pages using an other paper source. 4-22 . press [Finish Scan] to start copying. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. Copying Functions Cover Add a cover to the finished copies. The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below. If the originals are placed on the platen. The following two options are available. 1 Press the Copy key. Type of Cover Description Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different paper. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover]. Select either [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers]. After scanning all originals.

the first page of the originals should be placed on the top. Press [Select Form] to display the Form Overlay . 100) Off % Select NOTE: You can select the form density setting through Stored Form 4 levels from 10%. refer to Form for Form Overlay on page 7-20 for details. You can also use a form that is already Density registered in the machine's memory. :30% Forms Original Copy NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. Select the desired form from the Box Name Up list and press [OK]. the form is overlaid onto the original.30. 1 Press the Copy key. 5 Place the originals. Press the [+] or Scan New Form [-] buttons in Density. Copying Functions Form Overlay Copy the original images onto the form. 30% or 100%. Density :100% 4 Follow the steps shown below for form overlay. Once you scan and register the form. To register a form in advance. Form for Form Overlay Custom Box Detail 1/1 NOTE: To return to a higher level folder. Copies 3 Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of originals as a form. Form Overlay Density (10 . 20%. Original : A4 None Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Select Preview Form Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies To use the forms already registered. When using the optional document processor. 2 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay]. 6 Press the Start key to start copying. press [Up]. press [Select Stored Form]. 4-23 . Preview Open Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [OK].Select Form document boxes that store documents which can Document Box be used as a form.

1 Press the Copy key.1] or [1/n]. Copying Functions Page # Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. or [Overwrite] can be selected. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #]. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Font Set the font of the printed page number. Top Middle. For details on registering font sizes. Item Detail Font Size Set the font size of the printed page number. Density Set the density of the color of the printed page number. The formats for numbering are [-1-].* Style Set the font style of the printed page number. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. * Registered font sizes are displayed. Pattern [Transparent]. Top Right. Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position. Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies. 4-24 . Display Set the display method of the printed page number. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n. Bottom Left. Select Top Left. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. refer to System Stamp on page 9-29. Original [ – 1 –] [P. [Clipping]. [P.1] [1/n] Items that can be set for the page number font are indicated below.

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. Page # Position Off Top Top Top Auto 5 Select the page numbering position. Then press [OK]. You can set a value up to -10. Press [Denominator #] and select [Manual]. 11 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. Press [OK]. press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the # 1/n 2 2 starting page.10) Start # (1 . [P. Font Original # Keys # Keys Orientation 7 To start the numbering with a number other than 1. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. 4-25 .1 1st Page (1 . 4 Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the starting number. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total number of pages and press [OK]. Left Middle Right Last Page -1- 6 Bottom Bottom Bottom Left Middle Right Auto To start page numbering from a page other than the P. You can also enter the number with 9 pt Top Edge Black on Top the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. 10 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can be changed manually. Copying Functions Copies 4 Select the numbering format from [-1-]. 8 Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the page numbering. press [Last Page]. Select Manual and use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered (a negative number of pages counting backwards from the last page).999) Denominator first page. 13 Press the Start key to start copying. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. 12 Press [OK]. 9 If you do not want page numbering through to the last page.1] or [1/n].

Ledger. B5. NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3. Statement-R. B5-R. A4. Legal. 8K. Copying Functions Memo Page Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. Original Copy Layout B Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page. Folio. Original Copy 4-26 . Layout A Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page. A5-R. Letter-R. B4. Oficio II. 216×340mm. Letter. leaving the other half blank for notes. A4-R. leaving the other half blank for notes. 16K and 16K-R. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.

Status 10/10/2010 10:10 8 Press the Start key to start copying. 4-27 . Press [OK]. Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following boundary lines are available. Memo Page Layout Off 5 Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary Place original. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Select the page layout from Layout. 1 Press the Copy key. Original Preview Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK 7 Press [OK]. Top Top L to R R to L None Layout B Border Line 6 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of Original Original : : --- A4 the originals. Copies 4 Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Press [OK]. 4 None Solid Dotted Borders (Cropmark) Use the procedures below to insert page boundary lines on your copies. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page]. Layout A line. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge Top Edge Zoom Zoom Paper Paper : : 100% 100% : : --- A4 Top L to B Top R to B on Top on Left].

Copies 4 Press [Zoom Priority]. Original Copy Double Copy Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet. press [Double Copy] and (25 . Original Copy Follow the steps shown below to use Image Repeat. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat]. Original : A4 Off Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Specify Repeat Area 6 To set the area of the original to be repeated. For example. Double Copy Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.400) Off 100 % proceed to step 8. Zoom Priority # Keys 5 Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size. Image Repeat To make double copies. you can double-copy an A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 1 Press the Copy key. You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-28 . Image Repeat Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification. press [On] for Specify Repeat Area. Copying Functions Image Repeat Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image.

Copying begins. 9 Press the Start key. 4-29 . With metric models. Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area 4 Y2: Height of repeat area X2: Width of repeat area 8 Press [OK]. Copying Functions 7 Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be repeated. you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#- Keys].

Copies 4 Press [On].* Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. Font Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp. refer to System Stamp Method Position Font Original Orientation Stamp on page 9-29. Method Page Each Original Stamp each page of the document. [Transparent]. Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. Use the procedures below to specify the Text Stamp settings. For details. Item Detail Stamp Each Print Stamp on each printed page. [Middle Left]. The items that may be configured are as follows. [Middle Right]. see Printing Jobs on page 9-30. NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. [Center]. [Top Right]. Copying Functions Text Stamp When making copies. [Bottom Middle]. [Top Middle]. * Registered font sizes are displayed. 2 Place the originals on the platen. For details on registering font sizes. or [Overwrite] can be selected. refer to System Stamp on page 9-29. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. 4-30 . 1 Press the Copy key. This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. Display Set the display method of the printed text stamp. Page Position Selectable positions are [Top Left]. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Text Stamp]. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method for the text stamp. [Bottom Left]. Text Stamp 5 Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be Off Stamp printed. and [Bottom Right]. URGENT COPY NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. you can print a text stamp on copy output. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp. Pattern [Clipping]. For Each Print Page Top Left 9 pt Black Top Edge on Top details on registering templates. or select a text stamp from the displayed Keyboard On templates.

and [Bottom Right]. For details on registering font sizes. 9 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. Font Set the font of the printed bates stamp. 10 Press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. [Clipping]. 1 Press the Copy key. [Center]. Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings. or [Overwrite] can be selected. [Middle Left]. see Printing Jobs on page 9-30. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. 4-31 . * Registered font sizes are displayed. Copying Functions 7 Press [Position] and select the position of the text stamp. Pattern [Transparent]. [Top Middle]. 8 Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the text stamp. [Bottom Middle]. For details. Copying begins.* Style Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. 3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Bates Stamp]. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. 11 Press the Start key. Display Set the display method of the printed bates stamp. NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. [Middle Right]. Density Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp. [Bottom Left]. Then press [OK]. [Top Right]. The items that may be configured are as follows. refer to System Stamp on page 9-29. Font Size Set the font size of the printed bates stamp. you can print a bates stamp on the originals. 4 Bates Stamp When making copies. Item Detail Position Selectable positions are [Top Left].

If you selected [Numbering]. Off [Date] [Numbering]. or [YYYY/ Status 10/10/2010 10:10 MM/DD] to set the date format. 1 Top Left 9 pt Top Edge Black on Top Numbering Default Position Font Original Orientation If you selected [Date]. 6 Press [Position] and select the position of the bates stamp. 9 Press [OK]. or [Text 2]. press [Change] Text 1 Change Text 2 Change Date Format below it and enter the text string to be printed. 4-32 . [Text 1]. press [Date Format] and Add Shortcut Cancel OK select [MM/DD/YYYY]. 7 Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the bates stamp. Numbering Text 1 Text 2 If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2]. and set additional On Date User Name Serial Number Delete information to be printed in the stamp. Copying Functions Copies 4 Press [On]. Copying begins. press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to 9999999). Then press [OK]. Bates Stamp Stamp 5 Press [Date]. [DD/MM/YYYY]. 10 Press the Start key. 8 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. [Serial Number]. [User Name].

Low High On 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press [OK]. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below. Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key to start copying. 3 Press [Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint]. EcoPrint 5 Press [1] to [5] (Low . 4 Copies 4 Press [On]. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary.High) to adjust the Toner Toner Save Level Off Save Level. 4-33 .

Blur Sharpen -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 6 Press [OK]. Text/Fine Line Normal Make letters and lines appear sharper.Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines. Item Detail All Sharpen Emphasize the image outline. Copies 5 When [All] is selected. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness. in which moire* patterns appear. 4-34 . Sharpen * Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. Blur Blur the image outline. 4 Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line]. Copying begins. Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key. Sharpness All When [Text/Fine Line] is selected. edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Blur]. Copying Functions Sharpness Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. The table below shows the available settings. press [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness. Only text and fine lines are emphasized. clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. 1 Press the Copy key. 3 Press [Image Quality] and then Press [Sharpness]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos. 2 Place the originals on the platen. press [0] to [3] Text/Fine Line (Normal . Can weaken a Moire* effect.

4 Press [Auto] or [Manual]. Lighter Darker Auto 1 2 3 4 5 Manual Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press the Start key. If the ground color is obtrusive.Darker) to adjust the background density. press [1] to [5] (Lighter . Copies 5 When [Manual] is selected. The smaller the number becomes lighter the background becomes. such as newspapers. Copying begins. Remove dark background from originals. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Background Density Adj. Copying Functions Background Density Adj. select [Auto]. Original Copy Follow the steps below to use background density adjust. 3 Press [Image Quality] and then press [Background Density Adj. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color. select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color. Off Background 6 Press [OK]. 4-35 .]. 4 1 Press the Copy key.

Original : A4 Off On Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press the Start key. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. The procedure for using prevent bleed-thru copying is explained below. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected. Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-thru 5 Press [OK]. 4-36 . Copying Functions Prevent Bleed-thru Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. Copies 4 Press [On]. 3 Press [Image Quality] and then press [Prevent Bleed-thru]. Copying begins.

4-37 .: 000021 Job Name: doc20080505113414 User Name: ----- Scanner Setting Finishing If [Job Build] is selected. press [Finish Scan] to start copying. Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals. press [On]. 2-sided/Book Zoom Border Erase Original Next Copy: On Back Sheet Density Insertion 1/2 Cancel Finish Scan Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Place the next original and press the Start key. the platen and press the Start key. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex copying to print the next page on back page. Place original. Continuous Scan If Job Build is selected. press [Job Build] and select Off Select desired binding orientation. With this function. Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time. you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying. Scan next original(s). Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank Size Orientation Image paper. 2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan]. Job Build Original : --- Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Binding Binding Binding Left Right Top Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Scan next original(s). • Prevent Bleed-thru If you use Job Build. Job No. Place the originals and press Start key. originals are scanned until you press [Finish Scan]. the desired binding orientation. After scanning all originals. • Original size • Paper Selection • Original orientation • Zoom • Original Image • Border erase 4 • Duplex • Density • Background Density Adj. Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning. On 4 Press [OK]. Place the originals and press Start key. Copies 3 If Continuous Scan is selected. The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below. Copies 5 Place the originals in the document processor or on Press [Finish Scan] to start copying. 1 Press the Copy key. the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. the next page can be pages Original Original Original changed.

NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode. 4-38 . 6 Press the Start key to start copying. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying. The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below. 1 Press the Copy key. 5 Press [OK]. Copying Functions Auto Image Rotation Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different. 1 Press the Copy key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image Rotation]. refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 9-22. 6 Press the Start key to start copying. 5 Press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing. 4 Press [On] to select Negative Image. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative Image]. 4 Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation. Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.

6 Press the Start key to start copying. 4 Press [On] to select Mirror Image. Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies. 1 Press the Copy key. 4-39 . 2 Place the originals on the platen. Copying Functions Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original. 4 5 Press [OK]. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].

net Subject: 1234 Job end report mail Job No. refer to Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24. refer Specifying Destination on page 3-39.com Address Entry Detail Address Book NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book. 4-40 . Add Shortcut Cancel OK 10/10/2010 10:10 You can view information on the notification Status destination by pressing [Detail]. saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish. User A abc@def. Copies 4 To select the destination from the address book.: 000002 Result: OK End Time: Sun 10 Oct 2010 10:10:10 File Name: doc27042005145608 Job Type: Copy ------------------------------------------------ 1234 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies. 2 Place the originals on the platen. E-mail can be sent to a single destination. press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and Job Finish Notice then press [Address Book] in the next screen. 1 Press the Copy key. Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. Example of Job Finish Notice To: h_pttr@owl-net. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice]. then press [OK]. For details. NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk. Select Off the destination to be notified on the address book Address Book Destination Detail screen.

Book Address Entry 6 Press the Start key to start copying. enter the Job Finish Notice address and press [OK]. Upon completion of the job. an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination. 4 Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4-41 . Off Address E-mail Address 5 Press [OK]. press [Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address]. Copying Functions Copies To directly enter the E-mail address.

The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished. NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. press [Date and Time]. enter the name for a copy job. The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority Override starts. and press [OK]. 6 Press the Start key. To and Date and Time can also be set.]. Added information is File Name doc displayed in Additional Info. File Name Entry Add a file name. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. date and time. Date and Time Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press the Start key to start copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished. Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job. You can check a job history or job status using the job name. [Job No. 5 Press [OK]. The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below. Additional information such as Job No. To add date and time. or job number specified here. Copies 4 Press [File Name]. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority Override]. 1 Press the Copy key. 1 Press the Copy key. add job number. 4 Press [On] to select Priority Override. Job No. 5 Press [OK]. 4-42 . 2 Place the originals on the platen. Priority Override Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Additional Info Job No.

Copying Functions Repeat Copy Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. Password(4digits) On # Keys IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code. 1 Press the Copy key. Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit. Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is 4 set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-44). Repeat Copy will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code Original : A4 Zoom : 100% beforehand if necessary. Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name Entry on page 4-42). you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. 6 Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job. Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Paper : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Press [OK]. Repeat Copy To register a password. In such a case. press [# Keys] and enter a Off 4-digit password. Refer to Job Box on page 3-42 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs. For confidential documents. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy]. Selecting Repeat Copy Use the procedure below to select repeat copying. IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off. 4-43 . You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting. the correct pass code must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Refer to Repeat Copy on page 9-28. Copies 4 Press [On].

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [DP Read Action]. Item Detail Speed Priority Priority given to scanning speed. Quality Priority Priority given to image quality. Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. Cannot be used when set to [On] in Document Guard on page 9-103. 2 Place the original. You can also enter the number from the numeric keys.50) A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the 32 job(s) number of retained jobs. 5 Press [OK]. DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor. Document Box/Removable Memory . 4 Select [Speed Priority] or [Quality Priority]. NOTE: The optional document processor is required. 1 Press the System Menu key. (0 . The table below shows the available settings. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Press [OK]. Copying Functions Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box.Repeat Copy Job Retention 4 Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. 4-44 . Copying begins. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs. 6 Press the Start key. retention number. NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero). you cannot use Cancel OK the Repeat Copy function. 2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and then [Next] of Job Box. Use the procedure below to set a DP Read Action 1 Press the Copy key. Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained. 3 Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.

.......Document Box..........5-6 5-1 ... For details on Using the Document Box................ • Printing .. refer to the Chapter 7 .........................5-2 • Using a Job Box........5 Printing This chapter explains the functions available for printing.........Printing from Applications............................................................

The Properties dialog box appears. 7 Click Source and select the paper source.Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications. install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD (Product Library). When there is more than one page. 5 Click the Properties button. 1 Create a document using an application. 4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. 8 Select paper orientation. paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray. select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers. click the Media Type menu and select the media type. NOTE: To print the document from applications. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Click the  button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list. Enter any number up to 999. Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document rotated 180°. 9 Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper. to match the orientation of the document. NOTE: If you choose Auto Select. Printing Printing . 5-2 . 6 Select the Basic tab and click the Page Size button to select the paper size. 10 Click the OK button to start printing. either Portrait or Landscape. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency. 2 Click File and select Print in the application.

Layout This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts. Each time you click an icon. 1 5 2 3 No. destination. 5-3 . For more information. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine. refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD. 3 Reset Click to revert settings to their initial values. and scaling. this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time. Publishing This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film. 2 Profiles Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Job This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Description 1 Quick Print Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Printing Printer driver print settings screen The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. Basic This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings. poster printing. You can use it to configure the paper size. Finishing This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media. combine mode. including booklet printing. Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. so it's a convenient practice to save frequently used settings. and duplex printing. Advanced This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data. Imaging This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results. including binding and stapling.

2 Click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard. 5-4 . 1 Click the ? button in the upper right corner of the screen and then click the item you want to know about. To learn about print settings. open the printer driver print settings screen and display Help as explained below. Printing Printer Driver Help The printer driver includes Help.

1 mm (18. After printing starts.When using the inner tray as the output location. do not stand up the stopper. To cancel printing.: Job Name: User Name: 5 Use MP tray to print on the following paper.5 mm (18. Set paper and press [Continue].53") or longer is handled as long print. 210x800mm Custom 1 Cancel Continue Status 10/10/2010 10:10 IMPORTANT: If an output tray that cannot be used for long document printing such as Mailbox (option) is selected in the printer driver. register the paper as a custom media type in the system menu. and press [Continue]. support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in correctly. To print on multiple sheets. and Media Type Setting on page 9-8. When you execute printing in this case.51") to a maximum of 1220. the output tray automatically changes to a tray that can be used. press [Cancel]. a message appears on the machine's operation panel. place each sheet after the previous sheet is printed. Job No. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) on page 2-41. 5-5 .0 mm (48") is specified for printing. and press [Continue]. Place the paper in the multipurpose tray. After pressing [Continue]. and select that type in Media Type in the printer driver before printing. continue to support it so that it does not fall. NOTE: When KPDL is used for PDL Settings of the printer driver. To print on paper that is 164 g/m2 or heavier. Printing Banner printing When a document length from 470. the print job is treated as long document printing. a length setting of 470. catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. Standing up the stopper may cause paper jams.

use the operation panel. refer to Private Print/Stored Job on page 7-14. specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. refer to Deletion of Job Retention on page 7-19. For details of the procedure for Proof and Hold Print Box. Private Print Private Print stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Private Print. The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time. you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off. When sending the job from the application software. The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel. NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. 5-6 . For details of the procedure for Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver. Proof and Hold Print Box Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver to send data as a Proof and Hold Print job. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print using the printer driver. For details of the procedure for Private Print. such as Private Printing. To continue to print the remaining copies. ensuring confidentiality of the print job. refer to Quick Copy/Proof and Hold on page 7-15. Regardless of this function setting. Printing Using a Job Box The Job Box stores print data in the machine's Document Box (HDD) for later printing from the operation panel as needed. The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off. In Private Printing. Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents. You can change the number of copies to print. or Proof and Hold Printing.

If desired. Job storage is useful for jobs that need to be available for printing at any time. When the access code is used. so that you can print a job without anyone else seeing it. You also have the option of protecting the print job from unauthorized printing by using an access code. Printing Job Storage Job storage is a Job storage (e-MPS) option that lets you store a print job permanently on the hard disk for printing later. This feature is available when a hard disk is installed and selected in the Device Settings tab. you can attach a four-digit access code to a Job storage job. the job is not printed until a user prints it at the printing system’s operation panel. even if the printing system has been turned off and turned on again. or restrict printing to approved users. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver. 5 5-7 .

Printing 5-8 .

........................................................................................................6-19 • Scan Resolution..6-22 • Color Selection...............................................................................................................................................6-39 • Color Type.........................................................................................................6-14 • File Separation......................6-15 • PDF Encryption Functions ....................................6-30 • Scanning using TWAIN .....................................6-36 • Send and Store .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-23 • Continuous Scan...........................6-4 • Zoom................6-7 • Mixed Size Originals .................6-12 • File Format.............6-32 • Job Finish Notice .............6-8 • 2-sided/Book Original...................................................................................................6-29 • WSD Scan ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-18 • Density ..................................................................................................................................................6 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals..................................6-35 • Send and Print ................6-11 • Original Orientation ......6-25 • Border Erase............6-41 • About Color Profiles .....................................................................................................................................................6-41 • Scanning with FMU Connection..................................................................................................................................6-28 • E-mail Subject/Body.................................................................................... • Original Size.........................................................................................................................................................................6-26 • File Name Entry .................................................................................................................................6-24 • Prevent Bleed-thru ................................6-37 • Text Stamp ......6-16 • Original Image.............6-6 • Centering ......................................................................................................................................................6-20 • Sharpness..........................................................................................................6-42 6-1 ...................................................6-38 • Bates Stamp.............................6-36 • FTP Encrypted TX ........................................................6-21 • Background Density Adj................................................................6-2 • Sending Size....................................

B6. Sizes 2 sizes except Standard A5-R. Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. B4. 16K. Choose the original size from the following groups of original sizes Item Detail Size Standard Select from automatic Inch models: Auto. Vertical: 2. Letter- Sizes 1 detection and standard R. Size Entry Enter the size that is not Inch models indicated in Standard Horizontal: 2. Metric models: Auto. B4. A5. B6-R. refer to Custom Original Size on page 9-4.00 to 11.00 to 17. 16K-R Others Select from Hagaki and Hagaki. Letter. Oficio II. B5. 216×340mm Metric models: Ledger. A4. 11×15". A4-R. Ledger. 16K-R. A5-R. Statement. A6-R. Letter. Letter-R. A4-R. Legal. Legal. Statement-R. A3. 8K. B5- R. Sizes 1 and 2**. ** The input units can be changed in the System menu.69" (in 0. Statement. B6. Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes. A4.01" increments) Metric models Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments). B6-R. Oufuku hagaki. Statement-R. B5. 16 K. 216×340mm Standard Select from standard Inch models: A3.00" (in 0. Sizes 1 . Folio. Custom 1 to 4 Custom Original Size *. A6-R. 8K. 6-2 .01" increments). Oficio II. 11×15" sizes. Folio. B5-R. Refer to Measurement on page 9-12. A5. Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) * Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4).

3 Press [Org. 1 Press the Send key. Standard 5 Sizes 2 # Keys Press [OK]. press [+] or [-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical). 6-3 . 2 Place the originals on the platen. Original Size Standard Auto A3 A4 Sizes 1 A4 A5 A5 Standard Sizes 2 A6 B4 B5 Others B5 B6 B6 Size Entry Original : A4 216x340mm Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview 6 Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Destination When you have selected [Size Entry]. and press the Start key to start sending.432) By pressing [# Keys]. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1]. you can use the numeric Standard Sizes 1 297 mm keys. or [Size Entry] to select the original size. [Standard Sizes 2]. Others Y (50 ./Sending Data Format] and then [Original Size]. Original Size X (50 . Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images. [Others].297) Size Entry 210 mm Original : 210x297mm Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview # Keys Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination.

Sending Size. A3. Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). 11×15" Standard Size. A4. 216 × 340mm Standard Select from Inch models: A3. and Zoom (page 6-6) are related to each other. 16K. and Zoom Original Size (page 6-2). 216 × 340mm except Standard Metric models: Ledger. B6. Oficio II. A6. A5. Sizes 1 as Original Size or Legal. A6. Sizes 1. B5. Sending Size. Sizes 2 standard size 8K. B6. B4. Relationship between Original Size. A4. Legal. Refer to the following table. Metric models: Same as Original Size. B5. B4. Oufuku hagaki Hagaki. you can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom). Folio. 6-4 . Statement. Statement. Letter. Item Detail Size Standard Select from Same Inch models: Same as Original Size. A5. 11×15". Original Size and the size you the same different wish to send as are Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary Sending Size Select [Same as Select the Original] required size Zoom Select [100%] Select [Auto] (or [Auto]) NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size. Folio. 8K. Ledger. The table below lists the sizes. and select the Zoom [100%]. Letter. Oficio II. 16K Others Select from Hagaki.

Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images. 1 Press the Send Key. and press the Start key to start sending. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1]. [Standard Sizes 2]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press [Org. 6-5 ./Sending Data Format] and then [Sending Size]. or [Others] to select the sending size. Sending Size Standard Sizes 1 Same as Original Size A3 A4 5 Press [OK]. A5 A6 B4 Standard Sizes 2 B5 B6 216x340mm Others Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview 6 Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination.

To select the original size vertically and horizontally on the page. and press the Start key to start sending. Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size. Destination 5 Press [100%] or [Auto]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 6-6 . see Sending Size on page 6-4 when selecting the sending size. Original : A4 100% Auto Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Specify the destination. 4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom]. Depending on the combination of original size and sending size. Zoom 6 Press [OK]. the image is placed at the edge of the paper. [Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match the required size. [100%]: Produce at actual size. use the centering setting described in Centering on page 6-7. Item Detail 100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size) Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size. 1 Press the Send key. 3 Select the transmission size. Enlarge or reduce the original. Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size. NOTE: When zooming in or out. The table below lists the available options.

By using the centering. Use the procedure below to center the image when sending a scanned image. 5 Press [OK]. 1 Press the Send key. or right side of paper. depending on these sizes. 6-7 . 4 Press [On]. left. 6 Specify the destination. the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right. a margin is created at the bottom. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering]. Centering is performed. Sending Functions Centering When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size. and press the Start key to 6 start sending. 2 Place the originals on the platen.

Originals of the Same Width When the original widths are the same. Sending Functions Mixed Size Originals Using the optional document processor. the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows. In this operation. the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time. • Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4) Ledger Letter Letter Ledger (A3) (A4) (A4) (A3) • Legal and Letter-R (A4-R and Folio) Legal Letter-R Letter-R Legal (Folio) (A4-R) (A4-R) (Folio) • B4 and B5 6-8 .

Folio B5-R A4-R A4-R B5-R 6-9 . NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: A4-R. A4-R. A4. B5-R. • A3. B5 6 • B4. B5-R. refer to Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) on page 9-10. B4. B5 A4-R B4 A4-R B5 B5 B4 • A4-R. and Folio. Sending Functions Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only) The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows. make sure to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information.

arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are aligned. Original : A4 Off Same Width Different Zoom : 100% Width Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination. *Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals. then send. Mixed Size Originals Scan all sheets in the document processor. and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. and skewing or original jams may result. 1 Press the Send key. Sending Functions Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch. and press the Start key to start sending. they may not be scanned correctly. Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from [Same Width] and [Different Width]. 3 Press [Org. even if differently sized. If the originals are not aligned in this way./Sending Data Format] and then [Mixed Size Originals]. IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different width. 5 Press [OK]. 2 Place the original into the document processor. 6-10 .

as magazine and book Binding Right * Only when the optional document processor and the Expansion Memory are used. 1 Press the Send key./Sending Data Format] and then [2- sided/Book Original]. Preview Orientation Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Specify the destination. Binding Top Open Book Original such Book Binding Left. [2-sided]. 6-11 . select the binding 1-sided direction and press [Original Orientation] to select 2-sided Left Right the direction in which the original is set on the Book platen. Original : A4 Zoom Send : 100% : A4 Top Edge on Top Original 6 Press [OK]. 2-sided/Book Original 5 When selecting [2-sided]. and press the Start key to start sending. Destination 4 Press [1-sided]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press [Org. or [Book]. Original Type Binding 1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided — 2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right. The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. select the binding direction. Sending Functions 2-sided/Book Original Select the type and binding of the original depending on the original. 6 Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals. When selecting [Book].

• 2-sided/Book Original • Border Erase NOTE: If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 9-16) setting in the System Menu. specify the upper orientation of the original . When placing the original on the platen Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left] When placing the original on the optional document processor Original [Top Edge on Top] [Top Edge on Left] 6-12 . the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions. select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. To use the functions below. Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly.

and press the Start key to start sending. Destination 4 Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] and [Top Edge on Left]. 1 Press the Send key. Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document's top edge. 5 Press [OK]./Sending Data Format] and then [Original Orientation]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 3 Press [Org. Sending Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending. 6-13 . Original : A4 Top Edge Top Edge Zoom : 100% 6 on Top on Left Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination.

) Color. Grayscale. Full Color. Full Color. Black and White High Comp. Black and White JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp. The table below lists the file formats and their details.) Color (Color/Black and White). Full Color.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale). You can use PDF encryption functions. Grayscale XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp. Grayscale. Grayscale * The file format can be set to [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b]. see PDF Encryption Functions on page 6-16 6-14 .) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale). Auto 5 High Quality (Low Comp. PDF] is specified. Grayscale. Full 5 High Quality (Low Comp. NOTE: When [High Comp. Adjustable range of image File Format Color mode quality PDF* 1 Low Quality (High Comp. you cannot adjust the image quality. For details. Compression Ratio Priority to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale). Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send. Auto 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color (Color/Black and White).) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale). Auto PDF* Quality Priority Color (Color/Black and White).) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale). Auto 5 High Quality (Low Comp. Black and White TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp. Full Color.) Color (Color/Black and White).

Original : A4 Off Each Page Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview NOTE: A three-digit serial number such as abc_001.. Destination 4 Select the file format from [PDF]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Create and send a file for each page 6 of the original that was read. 3 Press [Org. PDF PDF/A Encryption 6 Add Shortcut Cancel OK NOTE: If encryption is enabled. File Separation 5 Press [OK]. PDF]. File Format Image Quality PDF When the color mode in scanning has been TIFF Compression Standard Quality selected for Grayscale or Full Color. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Use the procedures below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals. 6 Specify the destination./Sending Data Format] and then [File Separation]. abc_002. Sending Functions Use the procedures below to select the file format for transmission.. and press the Start key to start sending. [TIFF]. Destination 4 Press [Each Page] to set File Separation. you can Off Off Zoom : 100% specify encryption or PDF/A settings. set the image Ratio Priority Priority quality. and press the Start key. File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page. Send : A4 Preview High Comp. 6-15 . [XPS]. is attached to the end of Status Add Shortcut Cancel OK 10/10/2010 10:10 the file name. 1 Press the Send key. JPEG Original : A4 XPS If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. 5 Press [OK]./Sending Data Format] and then [File Format]. [JPEG]. 3 Press [Org. and [High Comp. 1 Press the Send key. PDF/A settings Status 10/10/2010 10:10 cannot be specified. The scanned originals are sent after being divided into files of one page each. and send the files.pdf. Specify the destination. PDF].pdf.

File Format . Document On Confirmation Detail NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Appendix-9 for details on entering characters./Sending Data Format]. Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file. 6 Press [Password]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. enter the password to change the PDF file. On Confirmation select [On] of Password to Open Document.0 or later Password to Off. select Acrobat 3. Acrobat 5. 8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file. you can specifically limit the operation. and [Encryption]. enter a password (up to 256 Password to Edit/Print Off Password characters) and then press [OK]. When you send a PDF file. 6-16 . [File Format]. Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit) Password to Open Document Off Password 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file. On Enter the password to open the PDF file Open Document Password to Off. The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows. 9 In the same way as the entry of Password to Open Document. use the procedures below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission. Sending Functions PDF Encryption Functions If you have selected PDF or High Comp. you can restrict the access level for displaying.0 and Compatibility Acrobat 3. [PDF] or [High Comp. printing.Encryption 4 Press [ ] of Compatibility. 1 Press the Send key. select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.0 and later. Item Value Detail Compatibility Acrobat 3. and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password. Then press [OK]. 10 Press [Detail]. 7 Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. On Enter the password to edit the PDF file Edit/Print When you have entered the password to edit/print Document document. 3 Press [Org. PDF].0 or later.0 and later later or Acrobat 5. PDF for file format.

The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4. Item Detail Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible 6 Allowed (Low Resolution only)* Can print the PDF file only in low resolution Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution * Only displayed when [Acrobat 5. delete. Item Detail Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages* Can only insert. and select the item (the scope of limit).0 and later] is selected in Compatibility. Press [ ] of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of Printing Allowed Not Allowed limit). ** Only displayed when [Acrobat 3. and rotate the pages of the PDF file Commenting Can only add commenting Page Layout except extracting Can change the page layout except extracting the Pages** pages of the PDF file Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file * Only displayed when [Acrobat 5. 13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others.Detail 11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. 6-17 . The item to be displayed differs according to Changes Allowed Not Allowed the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility. The table below shows the available settings. Copying of Text/Images/Others Disable Enable Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 The table below shows the available settings. Sending Functions File Format . 12 Press [ ] of Changes Allowed. select [Disable] or [Enable].0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.

6-18 . Use the procedures below to select the quality when sending scanned originals. Text+Photo Select original image type for best results. and press the Start key to start sending. Original Image Select the image quality suitable to the type of original./Sending Data Format. Original Image 5 Press [OK]. * The for OCR setting can be turned on. no photos. Destination 4 Select the original image. When [On] is selected. Item Detail Text+Photo Text and photos together. 14 Press [OK] three times to return to Orig. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original Image]. 1 Press the Send key. This function is only available for black and white mode. Text* Only text. Item Detail Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file. 15 Specify the destination. 2 Place the originals on the platen. scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR. and press the Start key to start sending. Photo Text Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination. The table below shows the quality options. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file. Sending Functions The table below shows the available settings.

and press the Start key to start sending.5 -1. 1 Press the Send key. Sending Functions Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. 6-19 . Density 5 Press [OK].5 +0.5 -0. 2 Place the originals on the platen. You can adjust density using 13 levels. Destination 4 Press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter .5 +2.5 Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination.Darker) to adjust density. Auto 6 Lighter Normal Darker -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 Original : A4 Zoom : 100% -2.5 +1. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density]. The procedures for adjusting the density is explained below.

2 Place the originals on the platen. The procedures for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below. the better the image quality becomes. Destination 4 Select the resolution. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan Resolution]. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes). 200x400dpi Super Fine. 300x300dpi. or 600x600dpi. better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. 600x600dpi 400x400dpi 300x300dpi Ultra Fine Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 200x400dpi 200x200dpi 200x100dpi Preview Super Fine Fine Normal Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination. 400x400dpi Ultra Fine. the better the image resolution. and press the Start key to start sending. Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The larger the number. Scan Resolution 5 Press [OK]. 6-20 . However. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal. 1 Press the Send key. 200x200dpi Fine. Select fineness of scanning resolution.

The table below shows the available settings. Blur Sharpen -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 6 Press [OK]. press [0] to [3] Text/Fine Line (Normal . Item Detail All Sharpen Emphasize the image outline. Sharpen 6 Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images. press [-3] to [+3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness. 1 Press the Send key. Only text and fine lines are emphasized. Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Specify the destination. Text/Fine Line Normal Make letters and lines appear sharper. Can weaken a Moire effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos). and press the Start key to start sending. 4 Press [All] or [Text/Fine Line]. Blur Blur the image outline. Sending Functions Sharpness Select the sharpness of the image outline. 6-21 . Destination 5 When [All] is selected. Sharpness All Sharpness When [Text/Fine Line] is selected. 2 Place the originals on the platen.Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].

press [1] to [5] (Lighter . and press the Start key to start sending. such as newspapers. 6-22 . Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images. select [Manual] and adjust the density of the ground color. The smaller the number becomes lighter the background becomes. 6 Background Off Press [OK].Darker) to adjust the background density.If the ground color is obtrusive. 1 Press the Send key. Background Density Adj. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background Density Adj. Remove dark background from originals. Lighter Darker Auto 1 2 3 4 5 Manual Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Specify the destination. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color. Sending Functions Background Density Adj. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Destination 5 When [Manual] is selected. 4 Press [Auto] or [Manual].]. select [Auto].

Grayscale or Black & White. Select scanning color. Use [Auto Color] to automatically produce color originals in full color and black & white originals in black & white. 6 Auto Color Auto Color (Color/Gray) (Color/B & W) Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Full Color Grayscale Black & White Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination. Full Color. You can select from Auto Color (Color/Gray). Color Selection 5 Press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Destination 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning. 6-23 . Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images. 1 Press the Send key. Auto Color (Color/B & W). 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color Selection]. Sending Functions Color Selection This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. and press the Start key to start sending.

Destination 3 Press [On]. and press the Start key. refer to Fax System (V) Operation Guide. press [Finish Scan] to start sending. Continuous Scan 4 Press [OK]. originals can be scanned one after another until you press [Finish Scan]. When the scanning is completed. change the settings as necessary. When you have scanned all the originals. With this function. Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure. Original : A4 Off On Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Specify the destination. and press the Start key. 6 Place the original. Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. Continuous Scan is selected.) The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below. the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. 2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan]. Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning. 1 Press the Send key. • Original Size • Original Orientation • 2-sided/Book Original • Density • Original Image • Scan Resolution • Color Selection • Sending Size • Zoom • Border Erase • Prevent Bleed-thru • FAX TX Resolution (For details. 6-24 . Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time. 7 Place the next original. *Settings can be changed during scanning.

2 Place the originals on the platen. Destination 4 Press [On]. Sending Functions Prevent Bleed-thru Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. 6-25 . 6 Original : A4 Off On Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Specify the destination. Prevent Bleed-thru is selected. 1 Press the Send key. and press the Start key to start sending. Use the procedure below to set the prevent bleed-thru when sending scanned images. Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-thru 5 Press [OK]. 3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Prevent Bleed-thru].

Input units Border Erase Range Inch models 0 to 2" (in 0. Original Copy Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. the available ranges are as below.01" increments) Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments) 6-26 . The following options can be selected. Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original. Original Copy In each option. Original Copy Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges. Sending Functions Border Erase Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.

Sending Functions Border Erase to Back Page When scanning a 2-sided original. 6-27 . 1 Press the Send key. press [Back Page] and then Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Off 6 mm Border Erase Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter. and press [OK]. and press the Start key to start sending. Original Preview # Keys Orientation For 2-sided originals. Sheet # Keys Same as Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry. Item Detail Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting as the Page front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals. The table below shows the available settings. Sheet Bottom 6 mm Same as Front Page Border Erase Book Left 6 mm Back Page Press [Original Orientation] to select the original Original : A4 Individual Right 6 mm orientation from either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Border Erase Top Edge Zoom Send : 100% : A4 on Top Edge on Left].50) Off Top 6 Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [# mm Border Erase Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys. Border Erase (0 .50) Individual 6 mm Original : A4 Border Erase Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Preview # Keys Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Destination Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase. Border Erase Front Page Book Back Page Gutter (0 . this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original.50) borders for a book. 5 Press [OK]. Destination 4 Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase Border Erase Border (0 . 6 Specify the destination. 6 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].

1 Press the Send key. Date and Time Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Enter the document name.] to enter the job No. and Date and Time can also be set. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. A job number and the date and time can be added. 2 Place the originals on the platen. 7 Press [OK]. Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. 6 Press [Job No. File Name doc Additional Info [ Date and Time ] Job No. Additional information such as Job No. File Name Entry Add a file name. You can specify a default for the document name. 8 Specify the destination. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending. NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the document name. 6-28 . and [Date and Time] to enter the date and time.. Destination 4 Press [File Name]. and press the Start key to start sending. and press [OK].

[Body 2]. 6-29 . Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK 7 Enter the body and press [OK]. NOTE: For details on registering templates. 10 Specify the destination. Original : A4 Zoom : 100% Send : A4 Template Body 1 Body 2 Body 3 6 Press [Body]. enter the subject and body of the E-mail. or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. Subject Body NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the 6 subject. 8 You can press [Body 1]. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail. refer to E-mail Subject/Body on page 9-27. Sending Functions E-mail Subject/Body When sending E-mail. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/ Body]. Destination 4 Press [Subject]. 1 Press the Send key. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body. 9 Press [OK]. and press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. and press the Start key to start sending. E-mail Subject/Body 5 Enter the subject.

4 Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next]. Installing Driver Software (for Windows 7) 1 Click Start and then Network in the computer. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. click Cancel. For information on operating the computer. confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network- connected. When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen. the installation is completed. click Continue. the address book screen may appear. refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software. If the Found New Hardware window appears. press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending. Procedure Using this machine 1 Press the Send Key. Displays the screen for sending. 3 During the installation. 2 Right-click the machine’s icon (Kyocera: XXX:XXX) and then click Install. 3 Press [WSD Scan]. NOTE: Depending on the settings. In this event. 6-30 . NOTE: To use WSD Scan. Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008) WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen. Sending Functions WSD Scan (Windows 7. and WSD Scan Setup (page 9-96) is set to On in the network settings. NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears.

the address book screen may appear. Sending Functions WSD Scan . 6 Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer 1 Press the Send Key.Selecting Computer 5 Select the destination computer and press [OK]. 6-31 . etc. The send screen appears. pc000103 1/1 Detail pc000104 pc000105 Cancel Back OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Select the type of originals. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated. In this event.. file format. NOTE: Depending on the settings. Press [Reload] to reload the computer list. press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending. 4 Press [From Computer] and press [Next]. 7 Press the Start key. as necessary. 3 Press [WSD Scan]. 5 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images. Computer Name Reload pc000101 You can view information on the selected computer pc000102 by pressing [Detail]. Select the destination computer and press [OK].

Image Quality Select the image quality according to the type of original. The WIA driver is used in the same way. 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box. Settings Prevent Bleed-thru Hide background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. Configurations Image Quality Color Setting Select the color mode. 3 Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box that opens. see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software. and scanning a document that has been stored in a custom box. 6-32 . The machine’s TWAIN/WIA can be used for two types of scanning: scanning a document placed in the machine. The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. Item Detail Original Original Size Select the scan size of the original. The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box are as follows. Orientation Send Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided. NOTE: For selecting the machine. Scanning a document placed in the machine 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application. Configurations Resolution Select the resolution. Image Quality Density Select the exposure. Configurations Original Specify the type of binding. Sending Functions Scanning using TWAIN This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN.

and Delete selected configuration. Details Current settings can be checked. If a password has been set for the box. NOTE: For selecting the machine. Scanning a document stored in a custom box NOTE: To scan a document stored in a custom box. Add current Save current settings with a name and comment. When the Configuration button is clicked. 3 Select the Custom Box containing the document file to be scanned from the Box List. 6 The document data is scanned. 5 Click the Scan button. configuration Delete selected Delete saved settings. Sending Functions Item Detail Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings. 2 Select the machine using the application and display the TWAIN dialog box. the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and click the OK button. the document files in the Custom Box appear in the Document List. configuration 4 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor. When you select a box. Add current configuration. a setting screen opens with buttons for Details. 1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application. 6-33 . see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software. select a model name with (Box) from Model in the TWAIN driver settings screen.

6-34 . NOTE: In this case. 6 Select the document data to be scanned from Document List. 5 Click the OK button. Sending Functions 4 Set how to display the document data. Click the Setting button to select each item. the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from the Custom Box. delete the data from the Custom Box. 8 Click the Acquire button. Enter the document data name in the Search [Name] to find the data having the same document data name or the document data name with the same beginning. Invert Invert the document data color to start scanning. When the document data includes multiple pages. The document data is scanned. Item Detail View Change the display in the Document List field to List or Thumbnails. 7 Click the Detail button to display the selected document data. Delete After scanning the document data. select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The selected pages will be scanned.

saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice]. Sending Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. press [Address Entry] and then [E-mail Address]. NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book. Job Finish Notice Off E-mail Address Address Book Address Entry Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Enter the E-mail address. refer Specifying Destination on page 3-39. and press [OK]. refer to Command Center RX (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-24. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk. NOTE: The user’s PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. 9 Specify the destination. Destination 4 To select the destination from the address book. then press Book [OK]. 6-35 . Job Finish Notice press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and then press [Address Book] in the next screen. When the sending is completed. 6 Off Address Destination Detail Select the destination to be notified. Address Entry You can view information on the notification Detail Address Book destination by pressing [Detail]. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings. 8 Press [OK]. and press the Start key to start sending. Destination 6 To directly enter the address. the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address. 1 Press the Send key. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice. and press [OK]. E-mail can be sent to a single destination. 2 Place the originals on the platen. For details.

4 Press [On]. 0008 Box 8MB 2/2 0009 Box 4MB You can view information on the selected Custom 0010 Box 2MB Detail Box by pressing [Detail]. Send and Store When you send originals. Status Add Shortcut Cancel OK 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press [OK]. The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below. this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent. Send and Store 5 Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be Custom Box Off stored. 5 Press [OK]. The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below. No. [ ]. 1 Press the Send key. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box. 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key. 3 Press [Advanced Setup]. enter the password. 6 Specify the destination and press the Start key. 6-36 . 1 Press the Send key. and then [Send and Store]. this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box. Destination 4 Press [On]. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print]. Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed. 2 Place the originals on the platen. Sending Functions Send and Print When you send originals. Name Used On 0006 Box 6MB If a password entry screen for the Custom Box 0007 Box 4MB appears.

3 Press [Advanced Setup]. Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files. Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. 5 Press [OK]. and then [FTP Encrypted TX]. For details. [ ]. If you select [On] in this option. 6-37 . 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Refer to Adding a User (Local User List) on page 10-5 for the default login user name and password. refer to the Command Center RX Operation Guide. 6 NOTE: You can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. 1 Press the Send Key. you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. Click Settings -> Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the Command Center RX. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside Settings. 4 Press [On].

[Top Middle]. URGENT COPY NOTE: Templates that have been set will appear. Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp. [Green]. [Black]. [Transparent]. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Text Stamp]. refer to System Position Font Original Orientation Stamp on page 9-29. [Red]. or select a text stamp from the displayed On templates. [Middle Left]. [Middle Right]. Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 Press [Position] and select the position of the text stamp. [Magenta]. Use the procedure below to specify the Text Stamp settings. Copies 4 Press [On]. [Center]. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. Pattern [Clipping]. For details on registering font sizes. [Cyan]. This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings. Font Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp. Color Set the color of the printed text stamp. refer to System Stamp on page 9-29. The items that may be configured are as follows. Item Detail Position Selectable positions are [Top Left]. Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Yellow]. Text Stamp 5 Press [Keyboard] and enter the text string to be Off Stamp Keyboard displayed. For Top Left 9 pt Black Top Edge on Top details on registering templates. Sending Functions Text Stamp When sending. [Bottom Left]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. [Top Right]. and [Bottom Right]. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. or [Overwrite] can be selected. For details. see Sending Jobs on page 9-32. Display Set the display method of the printed text stamp. NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. you can display a text stamp on the originals. 6-38 . * Registered font sizes are displayed. [Bottom Middle]. 1 Press the Send key. or [Blue] can be set.* Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp.

[Center]. Font Set the font of the printed bates stamp. 8 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. [Black]. Display Set the display method of the printed bates stamp. Density Set the density of the color of the printed bates stamp. 6 This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings. Then press [OK]. [Middle Right]. [Cyan]. [Magenta]. or [Blue] can be set. [Yellow]. [Green]. you can display a Bates stamp on the originals. For details on registering font sizes. and press the Start key to start sending. [Bottom Middle]. or [Overwrite] can be selected. [Red]. Sending Functions 7 Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the text stamp. Font Size Set the font size of the printed bates stamp. Bates Stamp When sending. The items that may be configured are as follows. Color Set the color of the printed bates stamp. refer to System Stamp on page 9-29. [Top Middle]. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. and [Bottom Right]. [Middle Left]. 10 Specify the destination. [Clipping]. NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. see Sending Jobs on page 9- 32. 9 Press [OK]. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. * Registered font sizes are displayed. [Top Right]. For details.* Style Set the font style of the printed bates stamp. 6-39 . Pattern [Transparent]. [Bottom Left]. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Item Detail Position Selectable positions are [Top Left].

Numbering Text 1 Text 2 If you selected [Text 1] or [Text 2]. or [YYYY/ Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 MM/DD] to set the date format. Then press [OK]. 2 Place the originals on the platen. or [Text 2]. Each Top Left 9 pt Top Edge Print Page Black on Top Numbering Default Position Font Original Orientation If you selected [Date]. Bates Stamp Stamp 5 Press [Date]. [DD/MM/YYYY]. 7 Press [Font] and select font and display settings for the text stamp. press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 to 9999999). Sending Functions Use the procedure below to specify the Bates Stamp settings. 10 Specify the destination. [User Name]. and press the Start key to start sending. either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. press [Date Format] and select [MM/DD/YYYY]. 1 Press the Send key. 6-40 . press [Change] Text 1 Change Text 2 Change Date Format below it and enter the text string to be displayed. If you selected [Numbering]. 6 Press [Position] and select the position of the text stamp. [Text 1]. Copies 4 Press [On]. 8 Press [Original Orientation] to choose the orientation of the originals. 3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then press [Bates Stamp]. and set additional On Date User Name Serial Number Delete information to be displayed with the stamp. Off [Date] [Numbering]. 9 Press [OK]. [Serial Number].

RGB Profile: RGB FINE 1 sRGB Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 About Color Profiles The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color. NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you choose RGB in color type. Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine. sRGB Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems. 6 4 Press [OK]. Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software. 2 Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type. The table below shows the available settings. Item Detail RGB Send color document in RGB. Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the DVD included with this scanner DVD (Product Library) under the Color Profile folder. Send . 1 Press System Menu key. 3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB]. Sending Functions Color Type This sets the color type when you send color documents. 6-41 .Color Type Specify the color type to send color images. NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software.

6-42 . 2 Place the original. 7 Press the Start key. press each item and configure the necessary settings. this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the data format. you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the multifunction machine to be used. see File Management Utility User Guide on the DVD. FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on the provided DVD. 6 When the scan settings screen appears. NOTE: The first time you use FMU Connection. refer to Installing Software on page 2-16. 3 Press the Application key. Using FMU Connection to scan an original 1 Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is installed. and the file save location. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information and press [Next]. you must enable it in the system menu. To install File Management Utility. 4 Press [FMU Connection]. see Application on page 9-86. For information on using File Management Utility. The application list appears. For details. To use FMU Connection. scanning conditions. Sending Functions Scanning with FMU Connection "FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application. The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility. FMU Connection starts. Transmission starts. Unlike regular transmission functions. and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder.

......7-26 7-1 ....7-2 • Job Box ..................................7-22 • Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...................... • Using a Custom Box .............................7-24 • Removing USB Memory ..................................................................................................7-14 • Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory...........................7 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box............................................................

Creating a New Custom Box (Add/Edit Box) Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box. The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity. the smallest number available will be automatically assigned. 1 Press the Document Box key. 4 Press [Change] for each item. If you enter 0000. Item Detail Box No Enter the box number by pressing [-. Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. the storage capacity for a box can be restricted. Entering a password is not mandatory. You can enter a limit between 1 and 30. Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters. The table below lists the items to be set. For details on User Logon privileges. A Custom Box should have a unique number. +] or number keys.000. Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box. enter the information and then press [OK]. Document Box Using a Custom Box NOTE: In the following explanation. Search(Name) Search(No. No. (Changes according to the number of created custom boxes. +] or number keys. it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing [-.) 1/1 Add/Edit Box Store File Detail Open Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 3 Press [Add]. refer to User Privileges on page 3-49. Name Owner Used 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm Password].) 7-2 . 2 Press [Custom Box] and then [Add/Edit Box].

press [Prohibit]. "Owner" and "Permission" are also displayed. To disable automatic file deletion. Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored. Press [# Keys] to enter the time directly using the numeric keys. 21 30 # Keys # Keys Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7-3 . The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below. press [Off]. Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored. Delete after Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. [Next] of Default Setting and then [Change] of Auto File Deletion Time. 2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 7 5 Check the details you have entered and then press [Add]. pressing [+]. press [Permit]. press [Off]. Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3-50. The time for document deletion is set. press [On]. Setting the document deletion time Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted. The Custom Box is created. [Next] of Custom Box. NOTE: If user login administration is enabled. [-]. Document Box/Removable Memory . To retain old documents. Document Box Item Detail Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. To overwrite old documents.Auto File Deletion Time 3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by Set the time to automatically delete stored documents. To retain the document. To delete Printed the document. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). Hour Minute 4 Press [OK].

B4. refer to Document Store features on page 7-4. Search(Name) Search(No. scanning density. 16K. • File Name Entry (page 6-28) (page 6-22) Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name. A4. Name Owner Used 0001 SALES Anonymous ---. • Original Size (page 6-2) • Density (page 6-19) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) • Original Image (page 6-18) • Centering (page 6-7) • 2-sided/Book Original (page 6-11) • Scan Resolution (page 6-20) • Border Erase (page 6-26) • Original Orientation (page 6-12) • Color Selection (page 6-23) • Continuous Scan (page 6-24) • Storing Size (page 7-4) • Sharpness (page 6-21) • Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) • Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) • Background Density Adj. 3 Press [Custom Box]. 1 Press the Document Box key. Letter. Metric Select from A3. Item Description Same as Original Size Store an image the same size as the original. inch Select from Ledger.. Others Select from 8K. select the box where the document will be stored and then press [Store File]. etc. Hagaki or Oufuku hagaki. For the features that can be selected. Folio or 216 × 340 mm. 7-4 . A5. B5. Document Store features The features below can be selected when saving a document. Statement. A6. B6.) 1/1 Add/Edit Box Store File Detail Open Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Select the type of originals. No. as necessary. Legal. 11 × 15" or Oficio II. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box. 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Document Box Storing Documents (Store File) The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below. 5 Press the Start key.

0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 NOTE: To deselect. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. as desired. • To use the settings saved with the document. Press [Start Print] to start printing. press [Print after Change Settings] and change the print settings. the print settings selection screen appears. Printing of the selected document begins. duplex printing.. Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Set the paper selection. etc. For the features that can be selected. enter the correct password. NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. • To change the print settings. • To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved). 1 Press the Document Box key. 7-5 . After a document saved in the machine is selected. 6 Press the Start key. If a document stored from a computer is selected. select the box containing the document you want to print and press [Open]. • If you need to change the print settings. the [User File Settings] key may appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used. 2 Press [Custom Box]. Box: 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox. change the print settings. press [User File Settings]. press [Print As Is]. 7 Detail Preview Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File 4 Press [Print]. Document Box Printing Documents (Print) The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below. press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark. refer to Document print features on page 7-6.

• Paper Selection (page 4-3) • Cover (page 4-22) • Fold (page 4-11) • Collate/Offset (page 3-14) • Form Overlay (page 7-9) • Text Stamp (page 4-30) • Staple (page 3-18) • Page # (page 4-24) • Bates Stamp (page 4-31) • Punch (page 3-20) • Job Finish Notice (page 4-40) • Density (page 3-8) • Paper Output (page 4-13) • File Name Entry (page 4-42) • Original Image (page 3-9) • Combine (page 4-14) • Delete after Printed (page 7-2) • Sharpness (page 4-34) • Margin/Centering (page 4-16) • Priority Override (page 4-42) • Background Density Adj. Document Box Document print features The features below can be selected when printing a document. (page 4-35) • Booklet (page 4-20) • EcoPrint (page 4-33) • Prevent Bleed-thru (page 4-36) • Duplex (page 3-12) • Zoom (page 6-6) 7-6 .

2 Press [Custom Box]. NOTE: For more information on selecting destinations. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 The screen for sending appears. press the checkbox again and remove the 7 Detail Preview checkmark. For the features that can be selected.. To deselect. 6 Set the sending size. the address book screen may appear. refer to Document send features on page 7-8. refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-39. 7-7 . NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. 1 Press the Document Box key. Document Box Sending Documents (Send) The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below. Box: 3 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 NOTE: You cannot select and send multiple documents. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. original image. 7 Press the Start key. etc. 5 Set the destination. NOTE: Depending on the settings. enter the correct password. Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File Close 4 Press [Send]. select the box containing the document you want to send and press [Open]. Sending of the selected document begins. as desired.

(refer to Fax Operation Guide) (page 6-22) • Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) • Text Stamp (page 6-38) • Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) • File Name Entry (page 6-28) • Bates Stamp (page 6-39) • E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-29) • Density (page 6-19) Delete after Transmitted After the document is sent. Document Box Document send features The features below can be selected when sending a document. the document is deleted from the document box. • Sending Size (page 6-4) • i-FAX Subject/Body • Original Image (page 6-18) (refer to Fax Operation Guide) • File Format (page 6-14) • FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37) • Resolution (page 6-18) • FAX TX Resolution • Delete after Transmitted • Color Selection (page 6-23) (refer to Fax Operation Guide) (page 7-8) • Centering (page 6-7) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Sharpness (page 6-21) • FAX Delayed Transmission • File Separation (page 6-15) • Background Density Adj. 7-8 .

1 Press the Document Box key. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 NOTE: To deselect. 7-9 . and then press [Open].30. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. [Form Overlay]. [Select Stored Form]. 7 Press [OK]. 9 Press the Start key. and then [Select Form]. 30% or 100%. select the image file to be overlaid onto the document from the displayed document boxes. 100) Off 30 % Select NOTE: You can select the form density setting through Stored Form 4 levels from 10%. 3 Select the document you wish to print by checking 7 Box: the checkbox. overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes and then print the results. Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Copies 5 Press [Functions]. press the checkbox again and Detail remove the checkmark. Press the [+] or [-] buttons in Density. Printing begins. NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. Use the procedure below. select the box containing the document you want to overlay the image into and print. Original : A4 Form 1 Zoom : 100% Paper : A4 Select Preview Form Add Shortcut Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 In Form Overlay . 20%. 8 Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen. Document Box Form Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay) This function allows you to retrieve images (image files).Select Form. You can only select one image file. enter the correct password. 2 Press [Custom Box]. NOTE: The optional Expansion Memory is required. Form Overlay Density (10 . Preview Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File 4 Press [Print].

press the checkbox again and Detail remove the checkmark. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. Preview Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File 4 Press [Move/Copy]. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 NOTE: To deselect. 6 Press [Next]. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine. Document Box Editing Documents This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together. NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. Moving a Document / Copying a Document (Move/Copy) The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below. press [Copy to Custom Box] or [Copy to Memory]. Box: 3 Select the document in the list that you want to move or copy by pressing the checkbox. select the box containing the document you want to move or copy and press [Open]. Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 To move the document. 2 Press [Custom Box]. press [Move to Custom Box]. 1 Press the Document Box key. Copy to Move to Copy to Custom Box Custom Box Memory Cancel Back Next Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7-10 . To copy the document. Move/Copy Select the required operation and press [Next]. enter the correct password.

Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [Join]. If necessary. Box: 3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by pressing the checkbox. etc. No. Cancel Back Move Status 10/10/2010 10:10 NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password. select the box containing the documents you want to join and press [Open]. move the 7 documents to be joined beforehand. 1 Press the Document Box key. Up 0001 Document1 Administrator 2 MB 0002 Document2 Administrator 3 MB 8 Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the 0003 Document3 Administrator 3 MB confirmation screen. NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. Joining Documents (Join) The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below. To copy the document to USB memory. 2 Press [Custom Box]. enter the correct password. 7-11 . Name Owner Used set the saved file size and the file format. 1/1 Detail Preview NOTE: To deselect. Document Box 7 To copy or move the document to a custom box. The selected document is 0004 Document4 Administrator 5 MB Open moved or copied. press the checkbox again and Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File remove the checkmark. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB You can join up to 10 documents. select the destination box. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. enter the correct password. NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. If necessary. Move to Custom Box Select the destination box and press [Move]. select the Document destination folder and press [Next].

are to be joined. Document Box Join 5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they Confirm the order of documents to combine. enter the file name for the joined document and press [OK]. NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name. File Name Date and Time Size Highlight the document you want to rearrange and 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB in the sequence. 7-12 . Down Cancel Next Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7 Press [File Name]. 8 Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:10 21 MB 1/1 Up 6 Press [Next]. Delete the documents if they are no longer needed. the original documents are left unchanged. NOTE: After joining. The documents are joined.

The delete confirmation screen appears. 7 Detail Preview To deselect. NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password. 1 Press the Document Box key. 7-13 . Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [Delete]. enter the correct password. 0002 2008101010574511 2010/10/10 09:50 21 MB 0003 2008101010574521 2010/10/10 10:00 21 MB 1/1 NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected. 5 Press [Yes]. press the checkbox again and remove the Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File checkmark. Document Box Deleting Documents The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below. Box: 3 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox. File Name Date and Time Size 0001 2008101010574501 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark. The document is deleted. 2 Press [Custom Box]. select the box containing the document you want to delete and press [Open].

2 Press [Job Box]. 8 Press [Start Print] to start printing. 1 Press the Document Box key. Private Print/Stored Job User Name Files 1 User 5 2 User 2 3 User 1 1/2 4 User 1 5 User 1 Open Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Select the document and press [Print]. Use the procedure below to print a document. 4 Select the creator of the document to print and press [Open]. the Private Print job is automatically deleted. 7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver. Document Box Job Box Private Print/Stored Job Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/ Stored Job. 3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open]. Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box. 7-14 . User: File Name Date and Time Size 1File 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB 2File 2010/10/10 09:45 30 MB 3File 2010/10/10 09:50 36 MB 1/1 Detail 4File 2010/10/10 09:55 21 MB 5File 2010/10/10 10:00 30 MB Print Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 If the document is protected by a password. Upon completion of printing. enter the password using the numeric keys.

1 Press the System Menu key. enter Detail 4File 2010/10/10 09:55 21 MB the password using the numeric keys and the 5File 2010/10/10 10:00 30 MB document is deleted. you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Use the procedure below to delete a document. User: File Name Date and Time Size When the delete confirmation screen appears. Private Print/Stored Job User Name Files 1 User 5 2 User 2 3 User 1 1/2 4 User 1 5 User 1 Open 7 Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 To delete the document. 1 Press the Document Box key. Quick Copy Job Retention To maintain free space on the hard disk. 4 Select the creator of the document and press [Open]. 2File 2010/10/10 09:45 30 MB 3File 2010/10/10 09:50 36 MB 1/1 If the document is protected by a password. 2 Press [Job Box]. Print Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job. 1File 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB press [Yes]. Document Box Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box. 7-15 . select the document and press [Delete]. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver. Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs. 3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

2 Press [Job Box]. You can enter any number between 0 Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. User: File Name Date and Time Size 1File 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB 2File 2010/10/10 09:45 30 MB 3File 2010/10/10 09:50 36 MB 1/1 Detail 4File 2010/10/10 09:55 21 MB 5File 2010/10/10 10:00 30 MB Print Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 7-16 . Quick Copy/Proof and Hold User Name Files 1 User 5 2 User 2 3 User 1 1/2 4 User 1 5 User 1 Open Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Select the document to print. Printing a Document You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box. The maximum number of stored jobs is set. 3 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press [Open]. Document Box 2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory]. Cancel OK Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [OK]. stored jobs. 32 job(s) NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero). Use the procedure below to print a document. then [Change] of Quick Copy Job Retention. 1 Press the Document Box key. 4 Select the creator of the document and press [Open]. [Next] of Job Box.50) keys. and 50.Quick Copy Job Retention 3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain. you cannot use the Repeat Copy function. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs. and press [Print]. Document Box/Removable Memory . You can also enter the number using the numeric (0 .

7 Press [Start Print] to start printing. File Name Date and Time Size 1File 2010/10/10 09:40 21 MB 2File 2010/10/10 09:45 30 MB 3File 2010/10/10 09:50 36 MB 1/1 Detail 4File 2010/10/10 09:55 21 MB 5File 2010/10/10 10:00 30 MB Print Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Press [Yes]. Document Box 6 Specify the number of prints as desired. [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold]. 3 Select the creator of the document and press [Open]. 1 Press the Document Box key. then [Open]. Quick Copy/Proof and Hold User Name Files 1 User 5 2 User 2 3 User 4 User 1 1 1/2 7 5 User 1 Open Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Select the document to delete and press [Delete]. 7-17 . Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box. Use the procedure below to delete a document. 2 Press [Job Box]. The document is deleted. User: The delete confirmation screen appears.

Document Box/Removable Memory . 7-18 . 6 Press [Start Print] to start printing. enter the maximum number of stored jobs. 4 Select the document to print and press [Print]. 2 Press [Job Box]. You can enter any number between 0 and 50. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs. Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. 1 Press the Document Box key. The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off. Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Printing a Document You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.Repeat Copy Job Retention 3 Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. 1 Press the System Menu key. [Next] of Job Box. The maximum number of stored jobs is Cancel OK set. 2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory]. enter the password using the numeric keys. Repeat Copy Name Date and Time Size 2008101000101002 10/10/2010 10:10 21 MB 001/001 Detail Print Delete Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 If the document is protected by a password. Document Box Repeat Copy Repeat Copy Job Retention To maintain free space on the hard disk. 3 Select [Repeat Copy] box. and press [Open]. you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Use the procedure below to print a document. (0 .50) 32 job(s) NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero). no jobs are stored. [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention. 4 Press [OK]. Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.

Document Box Deletion of Job Retention This setting specifies that documents. 4 Press [OK]. 7-19 . 1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour. such as Private Printing. 1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week. Regardless of this function setting. saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time. To deactivate automatic deletion. NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. The table below shows the available settings. 3 Select the time for automatic deletion. or Proof and Hold Printing. then [Change] of Deletion of Job Retention. [Next] of Job Box. 7 1 Press the System Menu key. Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents. 1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day. 4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours. 2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory]. press [Off]. Quick Copying. Item Detail Off Temporary documents are not automatically deleted. temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

Name Files Private Print/Stored Job 21 Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 21 Repeat Copy 21 Form for Form Overlay 21 Open Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 Form for Form Overlay 5 Press [Store File]. Name Date and Time Size 2008101009530900 2010/10/10 09:00 21 MB 2008101000530910 2010/10/10 09:10 30 MB 2008101000530920 2010/10/10 09:20 30 MB 1/1 Detail Print Delete Store File Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 6 If necessary. before the original is scanned. 7-20 . The original is scanned and stored in the Form for Form Overlay box. select the image quality of original. 1 Press the Document Box key. Document Box Form for Form Overlay Storing a Form You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. 2 Place the original in the document processor or on the platen. 3 Press [Job Box]. NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a stored form. etc. see Form Overlay on page 4-23 and Form Overlay from Custom Boxes (Form Overlay) on page 7-9. One page can be registered in one form. Use the procedure below to store a form. 7 Press the Start key. scanning density. 4 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].

7-21 . 2008101009530900 2010/10/10 09:00 21 MB 2008101000530910 2010/10/10 09:10 30 MB 2008101000530920 2010/10/10 09:20 30 MB 1/1 Detail Print Delete Store File 7 Close Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Press [Yes]. Name Date and Time Size The delete confirmation screen appears. 1 Press the Document Box key. 2 Press [Job Box]. Use the procedure below to delete a form. Form for Form Overlay 4 Select the form to delete and press [Delete]. The form is deleted. 3 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open]. Document Box Deleting a Form Stored You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Port (A1). press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen. NOTE: 1000 documents can be displayed. To return to a higher level folder. IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this machine. press the Document Box key and then [Removable Memory]. may appear. press [Up]. Limitations • The following file types can be printed: • PDF file (Version 1. Document Box Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer. NOTE: If the message does not appear.7 or older) • TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) • JPEG file • XPS file • Encrypted PDF file • PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (. 3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press [Open]. including the root folder. may appear. If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used. Displaying files. Printing (Print) Print documents stored in the removable USB memory. 7-22 . Removable Memory is recognized. • Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine. The removable memory is not formatted. including the root folder. To format a USB memory. 2 When the machine reads the USB memory. • Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels. The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels.pdf). 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1). Press [Yes] to display the removable memory screen. We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used.

Document print features The features below can be selected when printing a document. change the print settings. 7 press [User File Settings]. refer to Document print features on page 7-23. as desired. Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution. Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image. etc. After a document saved in the machine is selected. XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS files. Item Description Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size. JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. Document Box 4 Select the file to be printed and press [Print]. • To use the settings saved with the document. For the features that can be selected. the [User File Settings] key may appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used. 6 Press the Start key. enter the password before printing. • If you need to change the print settings. duplex printing. 7-23 . • Paper Selection (page 4-3) • Duplex (page 3-12) • Bates Stamp (page 4-31) • Collate/Offset (page 3-14) • Job Finish Notice (page 4-40) • Encrypted PDF Password (page 7-23) • Staple (page 3-18) • Priority Override (page 4-42) • JPEG/TIFF Print (page 7-23) • Punch (page 3-20) • Fold (page 4-11) • XPS Fit to Page(page 7-23) • Paper Output (page 4-13) • Text Stamp (page 4-30) Encrypted PDF Password To print a PDF that is protected by a password. Printing of the selected file begins. Removable Memory Name Date and Time Size Up 1 Document 2010/10/10 09:30 1 MB 2 Document 2010/10/10 09:40 3 MB 3 Document 2010/10/10 09:50 4 MB 001/999 Memory 4 Document 2010/10/10 10:00 1 MB Information 5 Document 2010/10/10 10:05 2 MB Remove Memory Print Delete Detail Open Store File Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Change the number of copies.

Removable Memory is recognized. NOTE: If the message does not appear. Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF. To format the USB memory. 7-24 . 2 When the machine reads the USB memory. TIFF. CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed. If USB memory formatted on another device is used. may appear. NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100. JPEG. Displaying files. Press [Yes] to display the removable memory screen. press the Document Box key and then [Removable Memory]. XPS or high-compression PDF format. press [Format]. 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB Port (A1). all data in the external media is erased. The removable memory is not formatted message may appear. Storing Documents (Store File) The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below. IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been formatted on this machine.

Removable Memory Name Date and Time Size Up 1 Document 2010/10/10 09:30 1 MB 2 Document 2010/10/10 09:40 3 MB 3 Document 2010/10/10 09:50 4 MB 001/999 Memory 4 Document 2010/10/10 10:00 1 MB Information 5 Document 2010/10/10 10:05 2 MB Remove Memory Print Delete Detail Open Store File Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 5 Set the type of original. • Original Size (page 6-2) • Original Image (page 6-18) • Border Erase (page 6-26) • Mixed Size Originals (page 6-8) • Scan Resolution (page 6-20) • Continuous Scan (page 6-24) • 2-sided/Book Original • Color Selection (page 6-23) • Job Finish Notice (page 6-35) (page 6-11) • Original Orientation (page 6-12) • Sharpness (page 6-21) • File Name Entry (page 6-28) • Storing Size (page 7-4) • Background Density Adj. For the features that can be selected. Document Box 3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Open]. • File Format (page 6-14) (page 6-22) • Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-25) • Zoom (page 6-6) • Text Stamp (page 6-38) • Density (page 6-19) • Centering (page 6-7) • Bates Stamp (page 6-39) 7-25 . including the root folder. The machine will display the top 3 folder levels. refer to 7 Document Store features on page 7-25. etc. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory. Document Store features The features below can be selected when saving a document. 6 Press the Start key. file format.. as desired. 4 Press [Store File].

NOTE: USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device. 2 Press [Removable Memory]. For details. Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory. refer to Check of Device Status. Removable Memory Name Date and Time Size Up 1 Document 2010/10/10 09:30 1 MB 2 Document 2010/10/10 09:40 3 MB 3 Document 2010/10/10 09:50 4 MB 001/999 Memory 4 Document 2010/10/10 10:00 1 MB Information 5 Document 2010/10/10 10:05 2 MB Remove Memory Print Delete Detail Open Store File Custom Box Job Box Removable FAX Box Program Memory Status 10/10/2010 10:10 4 Press [OK]. and remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed. 3 Press [Remove Memory]. IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory. 1 Press the Document Box key. on page 8- 14. 7-26 . is displayed.

..8-13 • Device/Communication ..............8-11 • Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ..............................................................8 Status / Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed..........................8-14 8-1 .......8-12 • Reordering Print Jobs ....................................................................... and how to cancel the fax communication.......................................8-2 • Checking Job History .........................................8-12 • Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) .......................................................................... • Checking Job Status ........................... This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices.8-9 • Pause and Resumption of Jobs .................................................................8-11 • Canceling of Jobs .......................................................

Screen Job status to be displayed Printing Jobs • Copy • Printer • FAX reception • i-FAX reception • E-mail reception • Printing from Document Box • Printing data from removable memory • Application • Job Report /List Sending Jobs • FAX transmission • i-FAX transmission • E-mail • Folder • Application • Multiple destination • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Storing Jobs • Scan • FAX • i-FAX • Printer • Join Box Document • Copy Box Document Displaying Status Screens Use the procedure below to display the Status screen. Available Status Screens The processing and waiting status of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in three different screens - Printing Jobs. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status 438 14:47 abc@def. Cancel Priority Detail Override Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies Communication Status 10/10/2010 10:10 8-2 . Press either [Printing Status Scheduled Job Log Jobs]. Status 2 The Status screen appears. [Sending Jobs]. Sending Jobs. Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. The following job status are available. 1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key. and Storing Jobs. Job No. For an explanation of the screen. or [Storing Jobs] to check Job Type All the status.com InProcess To check the scheduled transmission job. press 1/1 [Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job]. refer to Details of the Status Screens on page 8-3.

Printing: Printing Waiting: Print Waiting Pause: Pausing print job or error Canceling: Canceling the job 8-3 . Item / Key Detail 8 1 Job No. No. Printing Jobs Status Status Log Job Type All 7 Job No. Acceptance No. see Displaying Status Screens on page 8-2. of job 2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 3 Type Icons that indicate the job type Copy job Printer job Job from Document Box FAX reception i-FAX reception E-mail reception Data from Removable Memory Application job Report / List 4 Job Name Job Name or file name 5 User Name User Name for the executed job 6 Status Status of job InProcess: The status before starting to print. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status 000001 10/10 09:10 doc20081010091015 AAAAA InProcess 000002 10/10 09:15 doc20081010091510 AAAAA Waiting 000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 BBBBB Waiting 1/1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail Print Jobs Override Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies Communication Status 10/10/2010 10:10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen. Status / Job Cancel Details of the Status Screens The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows. For information on how to display the Status screen.

(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 8-12) 11 [Move Up] In the list. 10 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden. Item / Key Detail 7 [ ] of Job Type Sorts by specific type of job 8 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. and press this key. 9 [Cancel] Select the job to be canceled from the list. and press this key. Status / Job Cancel No. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 8-10) 8-4 . the printing jobs will be resumed. (Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 8-12) 12 [Detail] Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list. select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key. By pressing this key again. and press this key.

Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status 438 14:47 abc@def. or server name) 5 User Name User Name for the executed job 6 Status Status of job InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Sending: Sending Waiting: Sending Waiting Canceling: Canceling the job Pause: Pausing the job 7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed. * Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed. and press this key.com InProcess 1 2 3 4 5 6 1/1 8 9 10 Cancel Priority Detail Override Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies Communication Status 10/10/2010 10:10 The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen. E-mail address. and press this key. and press this key. 9 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden. 10 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list. 8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list. of job 2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 3 Type Icons that indicate the job type Sending Job FAX 8 Sending Job i-FAX Sending Job E-mail Sending Job Folder Sending Job Application Sending Job Multiple 4 Destination Destination (Either destination name. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 8-10) 8-5 . Status / Job Cancel Sending Jobs Status Status Scheduled Job Log Job Type All 7 Job No. Item / Key Detail 1 Job No. FAX number. Acceptance No. No.

Status / Job Cancel

Storing Jobs
Status

Status Log

Job Type All 7
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

438 14:47 doc20070225144758 InProcess

1 2 3 4 5 6
1/1

8 9
Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.

No. Display / Key Details

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Printer

Storing Job FAX

Storing Job i-FAX

Join Box Document

Copy Box Document

4 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

5 User Name User Name for the executed job

6 Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job

7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 8-10)

8-6

Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.

Use the procedure below to check a job's information.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing
Jobs].

To check the scheduled transmission, press
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

Status 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from
Status Scheduled Job Log
the list, and press [Detail].
Job Type All

Job No.

438
Accepted Time Type

14:47
Job Name

abc@def.com
User Name Status

InProcess
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
1/1

Cancel Priority Detail
Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/
Communication
Paper/Supplies 8
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

Detail Job No.: 000080
Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
information.
000080 Processing

Job Type: Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE

User Name:

User1

Job Name:

doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10 1/2

Close

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

Detail Job No.: 000080
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
000080 Processing

Job Type: Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE

User Name:

User1

Job Name:

doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10 1/2

Close

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

8-7

Status / Job Cancel

Detail Job No.: 000081
Status/Destination is displayed when address is
selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.
Job Type All

Type Destination Status
Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press
doc20070404131415 Sending [Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
User01 Waiting checking.
1/2

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

Detail

Close

Status 10/10/2010 10:10

8-8

Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.

NOTE: Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KMnet Viewer from the computer.

Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Printing Jobs • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable memory

Sending Jobs • FAX 8
• i-FAX
• E-mail
• Folder
• Application
• Multiple destination

Storing Jobs • Scan
• FAX
• i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document

Displaying Job History Screen
The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press either [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or
Status Log
[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
Job Type All

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000080 01/25 14:14 doc20070225141427 Completed

000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed

000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 1/1

000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error

000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed

Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

8-9

Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
Check the detailed information of each history.

Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history

Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing
Jobs] and then [Log].

Status 3 Select the job to check details from the list, and
Status Log
press [Detail].
Job Type All

Job No. End Date

000080 01/25 14:14
Type Job Name

doc20070225141427
User Name Result

Completed
Detailed information of the selected job is
000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed
displayed.
000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 1/1

NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous
000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error

000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed
page, press [ ] or [ ].
Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

8-10

Status / Job Cancel

Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs
Status Log
Status screen. Printing is paused.
Job Type All

Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

000001 10/10 09:10 doc20081010091015 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:15 doc20081010091510 AAAAA Waiting

000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 BBBBB Waiting 1/1

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been
paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].

8
Canceling of Jobs
For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-51.

8-11

Status / Job Cancel

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs].

Status 3 Select the job to be given priority, and press
Status Log
[Priority Override].
Job Type All

Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

000001 10/10 09:10 doc20081010091015 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:15 doc20081010091510 AAAAA Waiting

000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 BBBBB Waiting 1/1

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current
job in printing is suspended, and the job for
override printing starts.

5 When the Priority Override is completed, the
printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.

Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Cancel key.

2 Press the [Printing Jobs].

Status 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and
Status Log
press [Move Up].
Job Type All
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

000001 10/10 09:10 doc20081010091015 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:15 doc20081010091510 AAAAA Waiting
To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up]
000003 10/10 09:20 doc20081010092015 BBBBB Waiting 1/1
again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority
increases by 1.

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

8-12

Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Paper/Supplies].Check the remaining
amount of toner and the status of the waste toner
box in Toner Information, and the remaining
amount of paper in each paper source in Paper.
Toner Information Paper Others
Toner Status Size Type Status Type Status
Black (K) 100% A3 Plain 100% Staple A OK
Waste Toner OK A3 Plain 100%
A4 Plain 100%
A4 Plain 100%
A4 Plain 100%
A4 Plain 100%

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Remaining amount of toner
8
You can check the remaining amount of toner level from 100 to 0% (1% increments).

Status of the waste toner box

You can check the status of waste toner box.

Paper

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source.The remaining
amount of paper is shown by 5 levels as 100, 75, 50, 25, and 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray
is shown by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.

Others

You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

NOTE: If the optional document finisher and punch unit are installed, the Others section provides the status of
the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.

8-13

Status / Job Cancel

Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.

Displaying Device/Communication Screen
The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Device/Communication].

The screen to check the status or configure the
devices is displayed.

Check of Device Status
Status

Scanner Hard Disk
Ready. Overwriting...

Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory
Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2
Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Scanner

The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam,
opened cover, etc.) is displayed.

Printer

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.

Hard Disk

The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.

8-14

Status / Job Cancel

Configuring the Devices
Status

Scanner Hard Disk
Ready. Overwriting...

Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory
Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2
Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.

Removable Memory (USB Memory)
• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
• Press [Format] to format external media.

CAUTION: When [Format] is pressed, all data in the external media is erased.

• Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the 8
next section.

FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on
page 8-16 in the section afterwards.
• Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the
fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
• Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.

8-15

Status / Job Cancel

Removing the USB Memory
There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.

Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in
Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Removable Memory.
Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory
Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2
Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

3 When Removable memory can be safely removed.
is displayed, remove the USB memory.

Canceling FAX Communication
Cancel fax communication.

Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX
Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory
Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2
Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies
Communication
Status 10/10/2010 10:10

3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is
disconnected, and the fax communication is
canceled.

8-16

...................................................................9-108 9-1 ................................9-43 • Document Box/Removable Memory ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-107 • Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-90 • Interface Block Setting ..9-72 • Edit Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys) ........................9-2 • Copy.....9-103 • Data Security .....................................9 Default Setting (System Menu) This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel.............9-105 • Optional Function.................................9-102 • Security Level .......................9-54 • Report ........................................................................................................................9-86 • System Initialization ...............9-65 • Date/Timer .....................9-103 • Document Guard.......................................9-84 • Application ....9-77 • Internet................................................................................................9-52 • Printer .................9-89 • Restart Entire Device ......................................................................................9-40 • Send..9-89 • Network........................9-61 • Adjustment/Maintenance ............... • Common Settings ......................................................

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel. Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings Common settings include. The touch panel language will be changed. 4 Press [OK]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language. 9-2 . Use the procedure below to select the language. you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. 3 Press the key for the language you want to use. • Language …9-2 • Default Screen …9-3 • Sound …9-4 • Original/Paper Settings …9-4 • Measurement …9-12 • Error Handling …9-13 • Paper Output …9-15 • Orientation Confirmation …9-16 • Function Defaults …9-16 • USB Keyboard Type …9-29 • System Stamp …9-29 • Manual Staple …9-38 • Customize Status Display …9-39 • Low Toner Alert Level …9-39 NOTE: If user login administration is enabled.

Internet Browser * This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed. Item Description Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears. 9-3 . Accessibility FAX* The Accessibility Fax screen (the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Faxscreen) appears. FAX* The Fax screen (the screen shown when the Fax key is pressed) appears. Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/ Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears. Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen. Program The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is pressed) appears. Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed) appears. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen. NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on. Default Setting (System Menu) Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). 9 Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears. 4 Press [OK]. Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears. (Maximum 5 applications) For example. Application The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the Application key is pressed) appears. 3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen. 1 Press the System Menu key. The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.

Input units Dimensions Inch models X: 2. Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. 4 Select the buzzer volume level.00" (in 0. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select original size. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. Ready. 1 (Minimum) to Set the buzzer volume level. 3 Press [Change] of Volume.69" (in 0. On Emit a sound when a USB keyboard is operated. Ready Off. On Emit a sound when errors occur. On Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed. or other sound options. USB Keyboard Off.00 to 17. [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer. Default Setting (System Menu) Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. On Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed. Key Confirmation. Use the procedure below to set the sound options. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Job Finish Off. 1 Press the System Menu key. On. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Job Finish. Item Value Description Volume 0 (Mute). The dimensions available are as follows. Emit a sound when a print job is FAX Reception Only* normally completed.00 to 11. Warning Off.01" increments) Y: 2. Warning. * This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed. or USB Keyboard.01" increments) Metric models X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) 9-4 . 5 (Maximum) Key Confirmation Off. Original/Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.

Vellum. Recycled. or document box screen and press the Reset key. 1 Press the System Menu key.01" increments) V: 3. Default Setting (System Menu) Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Prepunched. 2 Press [Common Settings].86 to 11. or curling causes paper-over in the Inner Tray too quickly.83 to 17. Color. High Quality. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size. 3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4. Coated. 3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4. Input units Dimensions Inch models H: 5. on which you want to register the size. 5 Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size. change the cassette paper type to custom 8. Letterhead. 9-5 . Bond. Media type: Plain. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray. Rough. Transparency. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size.00" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) Up to four custom paper sizes can be added. Thick. and then press [+]. Labels. Custom 1-8 NOTE: Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for Custom 1-8 for the media type. Envelope. on which you wish to register the size. 9 Select media type for each paper size. 4 Press [On]. send. Custom Paper Size Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. 6 Press [OK]. 5 Press [OK].69" (in 0. If the output paper curls. 4 Press [On]. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 7 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key. (refer to page 2-39) Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type. Preprinted. 1 Press the System Menu key. Cardstock. and then press [+]. 6 Move to the copy.

Statement-R. [Next] of Cassette 1 to Cassette 7. B4. 3 To detect the paper size automatically. B4. refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11. 8K. A4-R. Bond**. To select the paper size. Legal. A4-R. Preprint***. 1 Press the System Menu key. Letter-R. 216×340 mm Metric models: Ledger. Statement-R. or Extra Heavy *** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. Size Standard Available options are as follows: Sizes 1* Inch models: Ledger. Letter-R. Letter. Rough**. Legal. on which you want to register the size. press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size. press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. 12×18". Recycled. B5-R. or Heavy 5 • Vellum: Heavy 4. the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected. or Heavy 5 • Thick: Heavy 4. or Heavy 5 • Letterhead: Heavy 4. Heavy 5. 8K. Folio. 12×18". 4 Press [OK]. ** To change to a media type other than Plain. 16K. Prepunched***. 16K-R. • Rough: Heavy 4. B5. High Quality. Custom 1-8** * Only A4. Vellum** (60 to 105 g/m2 or less). 216×340 mm Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1. Letterhead***. B5. 16K. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes (Cassette Setting) Select paper sizes and media types for Cassette 1. Folio. The previous screen reappears. Oficio II. Select Metric or Inch for paper size. When the paper weight settings shown below are selected. 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 to 5). or Heavy 5 • Bond: Heavy 4 • Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 4. Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for each cassette. Thick (106 g/m2 and more)**. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings. Item Description Paper Auto Automatically detect the paper size.500-sheet x 2) is used. Oficio II Metric models: A3. Letter. refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8. Sizes 2* Inch models: A3. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. A4. 9-6 . and then [Change] of Paper Size. 16K-R Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less). Color**. A4. or Heavy 5 • Preprinted: Heavy 4. A5-R. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Letter. or Heavy 5 • Color: Heavy 4. B5-R. and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1. 5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK]. A5-R. [Next] of Cassette Setting.

Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2 or less). 16K-R Metric models: Ledger. 12×18". refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types for manual paper feed. A6-R. Envelope C5. B4. 8K. A5-R. A4-R. B6-R. To select the paper size. 3 To detect the paper size automatically. If you select [Size Entry]. Rough. A6-R. 12×18". 9-7 . Folio. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings. Oufuku hagaki. Prepunched**. 4 Press [OK]. Youkei 4. B5. B5. Envelope #10 (Commercial #10). 8K. A4-R. Entry Inch models: H: 5. Letter-R. Youkei 2 Size Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes. Envelope Monarch. ISO B5. Oficio II. A4. Cardstock. [Standard Sizes 2]. B6-R. Letter. Envelope C4.00" (in 0.86 to 11. 16K. refer to Special Paper Action on page 9-11. Preprint**. Set up frequently-used sizes and media types before use. Sizes 2 Inch models: A3. B5-R. ** Refer to Media Type Setting on page 9-8 for selecting Custom 1. [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change] of Paper Size. Envelope DL. Transparency. Color. [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size. 16K. Executive.01" increments) 9 Metric models: H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less). [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions. Bond. Executive Metric models: A3. Recycled. Letter.01" increments) V: 3. 216×340 mm Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1. A4. Letterhead**. Letter-R. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Select Metric or Inch for paper size. Thick (106 g/m2 and more). Item Description Paper Auto Automatically detect the paper size. Folio.4 for Custom Paper Size.69" (in 0. Custom 1-8** * Refer to Custom Paper Size on page 9-5 for selecting Custom 1. Statement-R. Envelope #9 (Commercial #9). 1 Press the System Menu key. Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4). The previous screen reappears. 16K-R Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray (MP Tray Setting) Select the sizes and media types for the multi purpose tray. NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain. Legal. A5-R. Statement-R.8 from Media Type. Labels. Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys. Oficio II. press [+].83 to 17. High Quality. press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. B5-R. Coated. press [Standard Sizes 1]. Envelope. Size Standard Available options are as follows: Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger. Hagaki. Legal. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead. B4. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

refer to 1. *** A media type set for [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 5] cannot be set. 9-8 . and 4. The options for the media type and weight of paper are as follows.000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-27.000-sheet Finisher (Option) on page Appendix-26. Default Setting (System Menu) 5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].*** N (defaut) High Quality N Y Y Y Y N N N N N (default) Transparenci N N N N N N N N N Y** es (default) Custom 1-8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y*** N (default) * The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled varies depending on the paper weight. 52 g/m2 60 g/m2 76 g/m2 91 g/m2 106 g/m2 136 g/m2 164 g/m2 221 g/m2 257 g/m2 Trans- Media type to to to to to to to to to paren- 59 g/m2 75 g/m2 90 g/m2 105 g/m2 135 g/m2 163 g/m2 220 g/m2 256 g/m2 300 g/m2 cies Plain N Y Y Y N N N N N N (default) Rough N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N (default) Vellum N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N (default) Labels N Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** N (default) Recycled N Y Y Y N N N N N N (default) Preprinted N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y*** N (default) Bond N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N (default) Cardstock N N N N Y** Y** Y** Y ** Y** N (default) Color N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N (default) Prepunched N Y Y Y N N N N N N (default) Letterhead N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y*** N (default) Thick N N N N Y Y Y Y Y*** N (default) Envelope N N N N Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** N (default) Coated N Y** Y ** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y**. For details. ** The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes. Media Type Setting Select the weight for each media type. Paper types and weights Y: Available N: Not available Paper Normal Normal Normal Heavy Extra Light* Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Heavy 4 Heavy 5 Weight 1* 2* 3* 1* Heavy Weight (g/m2).

Use the procedure below to set the paper weight. press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following options are installed. Default Setting (System Menu) For Custom 1-8. 9 To change the name for Custom 1(-8). settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. The previous screen reappears. 6 Press [Close]. Name Change names for Custom 1-8. NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. Item Description Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed. Names should be not more than 15 characters. 3 Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK]. 8 Press [Close]. Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and Multi Purpose Tray. [Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed [Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1. 1 Press the System Menu key. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray.000-sheet) is installed 9-9 . Permit Duplex printing allowed. Enter the name and press [OK]. 7 To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8). [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting. the name after change will be displayed. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 4 Press [Change] of Paper Weight. The previous screen reappears. press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] 9 of Duplex.500-sheet x 2) is installed [Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3. 5 Select the weight and press [OK].

2 Press [Common Settings]. Item Description A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size. 5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source. If Plain is selected. 11x15" Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect. The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes. 1 Press the System Menu key. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 3 Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki. 1 Press the System Menu key. 3 Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (B & W). Folio Select Folio for automatic detection. 4 Press [OK]. 9-10 . Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the default paper source. 2 Press [Common Settings]. the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Use the procedure below to select the paper sizes and media types used by Auto Selection. Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15" respectively. select either one of them for automatic detection. Media for Auto (B&W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. 4 Press [OK]. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size. Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals. Original Auto Detect (Available for metric models only) Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size. 3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting.

2 Press [Common Settings]. 3 Select the paper source to load cover paper. Preprint and Letterhead. select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-5 or Multi Purpose Tray. select [Speed Priority].000-sheet) is installed Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.500-sheet x 2) is installed [Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3. Select this item to print on Prepunched. Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched. Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation. 9-11 . Item Description Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction. In such a case. punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. Print speed is a little slower. 4 Press [OK]. and Letterhead. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings. When paper orientation is not important. [Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1500-sheet x 2) is installed [Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (1. 9 The table below lists the available settings and their details. [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for Cover. 1 Press the System Menu key. Select this item when paper orientation is not important. Covers are used for Booklet (see page 4-20) and Cover (see page 4-22) modes. NOTE: [Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following options are installed. Preprint.

load the face. Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. 1 Press the System Menu key. Use the procedure below to change the input units. 4 Press [OK]. 4 Press [OK]. on which printing is supposed to be done. [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper Action. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement. 9-12 . 2 Press [Common Settings]. Default Setting (System Menu) If you select [Adjust Print Direction]. upward. Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types. Example: copying on Letterhead Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray. 3 Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch. [Next] of Original / Paper Settings. load paper according to the steps below. 3 Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].

Item Description 1-sided Printed in 1-sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or media type. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.000-sheet finisher or 4. NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1. Default Setting (System Menu) Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when an error has occurred. Item Description Ignore Printing continues without finishing. 9-13 . Item Description Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media types. Finished Pages Exceeded Select what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during printing.000-sheet finisher is installed. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1.000-sheet finisher or 4. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Item Description Ignore Printing continues without stapling. No Staple Error 9 Select what to do when staples run out during printing.000-sheet finisher is installed.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling. Item Description Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.000-sheet finisher is installed. Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling. Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray. Inserted Paper Mismatch Select what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match the actual paper size that is fed. To set the handling for a different error. Default Setting (System Menu) Punch Waste Full Error Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing. Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with stapling can be selected.000-sheet finisher and a hole punch unit are installed. 4 Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK]. repeat steps 3 and 4. Item Description Ignore Detection does not take place and the job is printed. 9-14 . NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 4.000-sheet finisher or 4. Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. 3 Press [Change] at the error for which you wish to change the handling. Item Description Resume at Top of Resume printing from the first page of the document. Item Description Ignore Printing continues without punching. 5 The previous screen appears. Page NOTE: This setting is displayed when an optional 1. Page Resume at Jammed Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.

Printer. and 4.C of the optional 4. 1.) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output destination. Finisher Left Tray Delivery to the left tray or top tray of the optional 1.000-sheet finisher are required. the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be used. print jobs from Custom Box. NOTE: The optional inner job separator. Tray A. 9-15 . Output Tray Descriptions Inner Tray* Delivery on the Inner Tray of the machine. 4 Select the Output Tray. right job separator. Job Separator Tray* Delivery to the optional inner job separator. 9 FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed. Tray B. IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately. Tray C Delivery to trays A .000-sheet finisher. Default Setting (System Menu) Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs.000-sheet finisher. You can specify the output tray for the second kit (Dual FAX). Use the procedure below to select the output tray. Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray). 1 Press the System Menu key. move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key. Fax Port 2 appears. computers. and FAX RX data. 5 When changing the output tray of Copy/Custom Box. The options are as follows. Finisher TOP Tray Right Tray Delivery to the optional right job separator. 3 Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box. NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed. If you have 2 optional fax kits installed. or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.000-sheet finisher. 2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output. * This cannot be selected when the optional document finisher is installed. move to the function screen and press the Reset key. When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 .

[ ]. refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation. Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. 9-16 .) • Zoom (XY Zoom) • Page numbering • Duplex • Booklets • Margin/Centering originals • Staple/Punch (optional feature) • Border erase • 2-sided/Book Original • Combine mode • Text Stamp • Memo mode • Bates Stamp Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting. move to the function screen and press the Reset key. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. The available default settings are shown below. (For more information. Refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. 1 Press the System Menu key. Top Edge on Left Select the original's top edge at the left. 3 Select the default for [Off] or [On]. 4 Press [OK]. IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately. 3 Select [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] for the default. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation. 2 Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation. Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Item Description Top Edge on Top Select the original's top edge at the top. Default Setting (System Menu) Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions.

3 Select [Text+Photo]. Text (Fine Line) Graphic/Map (Printer) For maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Photo (Photo Paper) For photos taken with a camera. etc. Item Description Text+Photo (Printer) For mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine originally. etc. Photo (Printer) For photos printed on this machine originally. Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines. 1 Press the System Menu key. 9-17 . [ ]. Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals. Image (Send/Store). Item Description Text+Photo Text and photos together. Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image (Copy). [ ]. The available default settings are shown below. Org. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Org. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Graphic/Map (Magazine) For maps and diagrams printed in a magazine. [Text] or [Text (for OCR)] for the default. Default Setting (System Menu) Original Image (Copy) Select the default original document type for copying. Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines. 4 Press [OK]. 9 3 Select the default original document type. Photo For photos taken with a camera. Image (Send/Store) Select the default original document type for sending and storing in a document box. 1 Press the System Menu key. [Photo]. Text (for OCR) Image quality suitable for OCR software. 4 Press [OK]. The available default settings are shown below. Photo (Magazine) For photos printed in a magazine. Text+Photo (Magazine) For mixed text and photos printed in a magazine.

3 Select the default resolution. 200x400dpi Super Fine. 300x300dpi. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Select. Color mode Description Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white.Select the default color mode. [ ]. 4 Press [OK]. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The options are 600x600dpi. Black & White Scan document in black and white. and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White. Full Color Scan document in full color. 400x400dpi Ultra Fine. 2 Press [Common Settings]. PDF Send files in High Comp. Use the procedure below to select the default color mode. [ ]. Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting. High Comp. The available default settings are shown below. JPEG Send files in JPEG format. Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white. File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale. 3 Press [OK]. The available default settings are shown below. File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. Item Description PDF Send files in PDF format. Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish. PDF format (refer to page 6-16). 9-18 . Default Setting (System Menu) Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution. TIFF Send files in TIFF format. 1 Press the System Menu key. 1 Press the System Menu key. and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale. XPS Send files in XPS format. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution. 200x200dpi Fine. 200x100dpi Normal.

Auto Set to auto adjustment. 1 Press the System Menu key. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy). File Separation Select the default file separation setting. 9 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. Use the procedure below to select the default file separation. 3 Select the default Backgrnd Density (Copy). [ ]. The available default settings are shown below. [ ]. [Next] of Function Defaults. [ ] and then [Change] of Backgrnd Density (Copy). 2 Press [Common Settings]. Item Description Off No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file). Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file. 9-19 . [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format. 4 Press [OK]. Backgrnd Density (Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy). 3 Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page]. [ ]. 3 Select the default file format. [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation. 4 Press [OK]. NOTE: Refer to page 6-15 for file separation. Use the procedure below to select the default file format. Item Description Off Do not adjust background density. The available default settings are shown below. Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: Refer to page 6-14 for file formats.

Item Description Off Do not reduce show-through. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store).(Send/Store). 2 Press [Common Settings]. Item Description Off Do not adjust background density. 4 Press [OK]. Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy). [ ].(Send/Store). On Reduce show-through. Use the procedure below to select the default BackgrndDens. 3 Select the default BackgrndDens. 1 Press the System Menu key. Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy). [ ] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy). [Next] of Function Defaults. Auto Set to auto adjustment. The available default settings are shown below. [ ] and then [Change] of BackgrndDens. On Reduce show-through. [ ]. Item Description Off Do not reduce show-through.(Send/Store). [Next] of Function Defaults. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 3 Set the default Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy). Default Setting (System Menu) BackgrndDens. Manual (Darker 5) Set to (Darker 5) in manual adjustment.(Send/Store) Select the default background density for sending and storing in a document box. 9-20 .

Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width. [ ] and then [Change] of Prevent Bleed(Send/ Store). Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border. 1 Press the System Menu key. The available default settings are shown below. Input units Range Inch 0 to 2" (in 0. 4 Press [OK]. [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default. 2 Press [Common Settings]. [Next] of Function Defaults. [ ] three times and then [Change] of Zoom. 3 Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.01" increments) Metric 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default settings when paper size/sending size is changed after the originals are set. 1 Press the System Menu key. 1 Press the System Menu key. [Next] of Function Defaults. Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting. [ ]. Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match the paper size/ sending size. 4 Press [OK]. Default Setting (System Menu) Use the procedure below to select the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store). [Next] of Function Defaults. You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly. 9 3 Select the default zoom setting. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set. Item Description 100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%). 3 Set the default Prevent Bleed(Send/Store). 2 Press [Common Settings]. [ ]. 9-21 . 4 Press [OK]. [ ].

2 Press [Common Settings]. The table below shows the available settings. 3 Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase]. 4 Press [OK]. [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back Page. Item Description Off No Auto Image Rotation performed. [ ]. [ ]. On Auto Image Rotation performed. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Margin Default Set the default margin. The table below shows the available settings.01" increments) Metric -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments) Use the procedure below to set the default margin width. Item Description Same as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page NOTE: Refer to page 4-18 and page 6-26 for Border Erase. Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back side of the original page.75" (in 0. 3 Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom. 4 Press [OK].75 to 0. You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly. [Next] of Function Defaults. 9-22 . [Next] of Function Defaults. [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default. Default Setting (System Menu) Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. Input units Range Inch -0. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set. 1 Press the System Menu key. Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. 1 Press the System Menu key.

Use the procedure below to select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). [Next] of Function Defaults. [ ] twice. 3 Select the default for [Off] or [On]. One of five levels [1] . Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint) Select the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). NOTE: Raising the level reduces toner consumption. On EcoPrint performed. 9 2 Press [Common Settings]. 9-23 . [ ]. and then [Change] of EcoPrint. [ ] twice. [ ]. Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings. Default Setting (System Menu) NOTE: Refer to page 4-38 for Auto Image Rotation. [ ]. move to the function screen and press the Reset key. 1 Press the System Menu key. The table below shows the available settings. 1 Press the System Menu key. [Next] of Function Defaults. and then [Change] of Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint).[5] can be set. 3 Select from [1] to [5] for the default Toner SaveLevel(EcoPrint). Item Description Off No EcoPrint performed. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 4 Press [OK]. [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation. but image quality falls. IMPORTANT: If you want to enable the changed defaults immediately. 3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default. NOTE: Refer to page 4-14 for EcoPrint. EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. 4 Press [OK]. 4 Press [OK]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings]. [Next] of Function Defaults. Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.

[Standard]. 4 Press [OK]. Default Setting (System Menu) High Comp. Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for high compression PDF files. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Image Quality (File Format). Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High Comp. Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Refer to page 6-14 for file formats. Use the procedure below to set the default Color TIFF Compression setting. PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files. [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. 4 Press [OK]. or [Quality Priority]. The table below shows the available settings. Item Description Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size. 3 Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority]. 4 Press [OK]. 3 Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].). Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp. 1 Press the System Menu key.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp. [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. 2 Press [Common Settings]. PDF Image. Standard Standard quality Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size. 9-24 . Image Quality (File Format) Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS file quality. 3 Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality). [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color TIFF Compression. 1 Press the System Menu key. NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

(If [Off] is selected of Collate. [Next] of Function Defaults. The table below shows the available settings. [Next] of Function Defaults. 9-25 . Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings. Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF Print. [Image Resolution]. Offset Off Offset not performed. [ ]. [ ]. Each Set Offset performed. or [Fit to Print Resolution]. Item Description Collate Off Collate not performed.) NOTE: Refer to page 3-14 for Collate/Offset. Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image. 1 Press the System Menu key. JPEG/TIFF Print 9 Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings. 3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively. Default Setting (System Menu) Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. 4 Press [OK]. it is (Each Page) performed [Each Page]. 3 Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size]. Item Description Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. The table below shows the available settings. 2 Press [Common Settings]. On Collate performed. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset.

3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to Page. [ ] twice and then [Change] of Continuous Scan. [Next] of Function Defaults. 3 Select [Off]. Item Description Off Continuous scan not performed On Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4-37 for Continuous Scan. Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning. The available default settings are shown below. Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults. Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings. 1 Press the System Menu key. PDF/A Set the PDF file format used on the machine. [PDF/A-1a] or [PDF/A-1b]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. [ ]. 4 Press [OK]. 2 Press [Common Settings]. [ ]. Default Setting (System Menu) XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. 9-26 . [Next] of Function Defaults. 4 Press [OK]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Use the procedure below to select the default PDF/A. [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] three times and then [Change] of PDF/A.

6 Press [OK]. [ ]. 1 Press the System Menu key. 1 Press the System Menu key. 5 Press [Body 1] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the e-mail body template. NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body. and then [Change] of E-mail Subject/Body. One of three templates can be set. set the template for entering the body text. 3 Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters. In addition. 8 Press [OK]. 5 Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job. can also be set. [ ] three times. [ ]. Default Setting (System Menu) File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry) on page 3-23. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. NOTE: Refer to page 4-42 and page 6-28 for name entry. The added information will be displayed in Additional Info. 9-27 . 4 Press [OK]. 2 Press [Common Settings]. or press [Job No. 7 Select the default body text from [Body 1] to [Body 3] in Default Template.] to add the job number to the job. Use the procedure below to set the default file name. 9 Check that the entries are correct and press [OK]. [Next] of Function Defaults. [ ] three times and then [Change] of File Name Entry. E-mail Subject/Body 9 Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail. [Next] of Function Defaults. NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-9 for details on entering characters. 3 Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 4 Press [OK]. 6 To register another template. press [Body 2] or [Body 3] and enter a maximum of 500 characters for the e-mail body template.

NOTE: The optional document processor is required. On Repeat Copy is performed. Item Description Off No Repeat Copy is performed. 3 Select [Speed Priority] or [Quality Priority]. The table below shows the available settings. DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor. Item Description Speed Priority Priority given to scanning speed. 2 Press [Common Settings]. 4 Press [OK]. 9-28 . Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting. Use the procedure below to set a DP Read Action. NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is set to 0. Press [ ] three times and [Change] of DP Read Action. Refer to page 4-43 for Repeat Copy. 1 Press the System Menu key. [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. 1 Press the System Menu key. The options are as follows. Press [ ] three times and [Change] of Repeat Copy. Quality Priority Priority given to image quality. Cannot be used when set to [On] in Document Guard on page 9-103. 3 Select the default for [Off] or [On]. 2 Press [Common Settings]. [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. 4 Press [OK]. Default Setting (System Menu) Repeat Copy Select the Repeat Copy default. The table below shows the available settings.

2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Page #). 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Add/Edit] in Text (Text Stamp). and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string. [US-English with Euro]. 3 Select the key in which the print text will be registered. [French] or [German].Size 3. The text set here can be selected as a stamp template during sending. and set the font size. 1 Press the System Menu key. set the font sizes that can be set. 1 Press the System Menu key. [ ] and [Change] of USB Keyboard Type. 9 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. 4 Press [OK]. • Basic • Printing Jobs • Sending Jobs • Storing Jobs Basic Select displayed stamp settings. Font (Page #) When page numbers are used. 9-29 . Use the procedure below to set a Font (Page #). footer. 4 Press [OK]. System Stamp The following header. 2 Press [Common Settings]. Text (Text Stamp) Set a Text (Text Stamp). Default Setting (System Menu) USB Keyboard Type Set the type of USB keyboard that is connected. and stamp settings can be selected in System Stamp Settings. 3 Press [Change] in Size 1 . Use the procedure below to set a Text (Text Stamp). 3 Select [US-English]. press [Add/Edit].

NOTE: When [On] is selected.Size 3. 3 Press [Change] in Size 1 . Use the procedure below to set a Text Stamp. After configuring the setting. Use the procedure below to set a Font (Text Stamp). the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing. 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Next] in Font (Bates Stamp). or select the text stamp to be printed from the displayed templates. 1 Press the System Menu key. 4 Press [OK]. Font (Text Stamp) When a text stamp is used. 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Basic > [Change] in Font (Text Stamp). 4 Press [OK]. 1 Press the System Menu key. set the font sizes that can be set. 3 Press [Keyboard] and enter a maximum of 32 characters for the text string. 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Edit Text Stamp.Size 3. 1 Press the System Menu key. and set the font size. 9-30 . Printing Jobs Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed. and set the font size. 4 Press [OK]. Edit Text Stamp Set the default text stamp. return to the Copying Functions or Document Box (Printing a Document) screen from the system menu. set the font sizes that can be set. Default Setting (System Menu) Font (Bates Stamp) When a bates stamp is used. 1 Press the System Menu key. 3 Press [Change] in Size 1 . Use the procedure below to set a Font (Bates Stamp). 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Text Stamp. Use the procedure below to Edit a Text Stamp. and press the Reset key. Text Stamp Select whether or not a text stamp is used. 3 Select [Off] or [On].

Each Original Page Stamp each page of the document. [Top Middle]. The following settings can be selected. 5 Press [Position] and set the position of the printed text stamp. 4 Press [OK]. Bates Stamp Select whether or not to set a Bates Stamp. [Clipping]. [Bottom Middle]. [Bold] or [Italic] can be set. 7 Press [OK]. 9 Density Set the density of the color of the printed text stamp. the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing. NOTE: When [On] is selected. [Transparent]. [Middle Left]. 9-31 . 6 Press [Font] and set font and display settings for the printed text stamp. or [Overwrite] can be selected. Font Set the font of the printed text stamp. [Middle Right]. 2 Press [Common Settings] > [ ] > [Next] in System Stamp > [Next] in Printing Jobs > [Change] in Bates Stamp. Style Set the font style of the printed text stamp. [Top Right]. Use the procedure below to set a Bates Stamp. 3 Select [Off] or [On]. Item Description Size Set the font size of the printed text stamp. [Courier] or [Letter Gothic] can be set. Positions that can be selected are [Top Left]. The following settings can be selected. [Center]. Display Pattern Set the display method of the printed text stamp. 1 Press the System Menu key. [Bottom Left]. Item Description Each Print Page Stamp on each printed page. Default Setting (System Menu) 4 Press [Stamp Method] and set the stamp method for the text stamp. and [Bottom Right].

The following settings can be selected. Style Set the font style of the Bates Stamp to be printed. press [Date Format] and set the date display format. return to the Sending Functions or Document Box (Sending Documents) screen from the system menu. [Numbering]. press [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence number (1 . [Serial Number]. Density Set the density of the color of the Bates Stamp to be printed. Default Setting (System Menu) Edit Bates Stamp Set the default Bates Stamp. Item Description Size Set the font size of the Bates Stamp to be printed. Font Set the font of the Bates Stamp to be printed. [Bottom Middle]. [Top Right]. Sending Jobs Configure stamp settings for sending documents. or [Overwrite] can be selected. and [Text 2]. [Transparent]. [DD/MM/YYYY]. and press the Reset key. [Clipping]. [Middle Left]. 6 Press [Position] and set the position of the printed bates stamp. [Middle Right]. [Bottom Left]. Use the procedure below to set an Edit Bates Stamp 1 Press the System Menu key.